1
ENGLISH
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
© CANON INC. 2016 CT0-D109-C
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(=
15) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Camera User Guide
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
1
● SDHC memory cards*
1
*
2
● SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Battery Pack
LP-E17
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E17/LC-E17E
Neck Strap
EM-300DB
Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU
● Printed matter is also included.
● For details on the lens included in the lens kit, check information on
the camera package.
● A memory card is not included.
Before Use
3
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright
and other intellectual property rights, even when such photographing
or recording is intended solely for personal use.
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate
camera damage or affect recorded images.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
Conventions in This Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
: Indicates touch-screen operations
● =
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all lenses and mount adapters are simply referred to
as “lenses” and “mount adapters”, whether they are included or sold
separately.
● The illustrations in this guide show the camera with the
EF-M 15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM lens attached as an example.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
4
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Part Names
(
1
)
(
16
)
(
17
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
26
)
(
25
)
(
23
)
(
24
)
(
27
) (
28
)
(
29
)
(
30
)
(
14
)
(
15
)
(
20
)
(
21
)
(
22
)
(
10
)(
11
)(
12
)(
13
)
(
2
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
9
)
(
7
)
(
8
)
(
3
)
(1) Exposure compensation dial
(2) [
(Multi-function)] button
(3) Main dial
(4) Shutter button
(5) Remote control sensor
(6) EF-M lens mount index
(7) Grip
(8) Touch & Drag AF switching button
(9) Contacts
(10) [
(Dial Function)] button
(11) [
(Flash pop up)] button
(12) Flash
(13) Microphone
(14) Mode dial release button
(15) Mode dial
(16)
Focal plane mark
(17) Strap mount
(18) Lamp
(19) Lens lock pin
(20) Terminal cover
(21) Lens release button
(22) Lens mount
(23) Dioptric adjustment knob
(24) Digital terminal
(25) Remote switch terminal
(26) External microphone IN terminal
(27)
(N-Mark)*
1
(28) Tripod socket
(29) DC coupler terminal cover
(30) Memory card/battery cover
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
1
)
(
5
)(
4
) (
7
)
(
20
)
(
19
)
(
18
)
(
23
)
(
22
)
(
10
)
(
13
)
(
16
)(
17
)
(
9
)
(
8
)
(
21
)
(
15
)
(
14
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
6
)
(1) Power switch
(2) Viewfinder
(3) Screen (monitor)*
2
/ Touch-screen
panel
(4) Hot shoe
(5) Flash-sync contacts
(6) Quick Control Dial
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(7) Speaker
(8) [
(AE lock)] button
(9) [
(AF frame selector)] button
(10) Strap mount
(11) HDMI
TM
terminal
(12) Movie button
(13) [
(Wi-Fi)] button
(14) Indicator
(15) [
] button
(16) [
(Playback)] button
(17) [
(Information)] button
(18) [
] / Up button
(19) [
(Manual focus)] / Left button
(20) Control dial
(21) [
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(22) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(23) [
(Erase)] / Down button
*1 Used with NFC features (=
130).
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (=
160).
● You can turn the control dial to perform
most of the operations possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, such as choosing
items and switching images.
5
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Lens
EF-M Lens
(1) Focusing ring
(2) Hood mount
(3) Filter-mounting thread
(4) Lens retraction switch
(5) Lens mount index
(6) Zoom ring
(7) Lens retraction index
(8) Zoom position index
(9) Contacts
6
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Attaching EF and EF-S Lenses .................................................24
Detaching a Lens ..................................................................25
Using a Tripod .......................................................................25
Using Lens Image Stabilization .............................................26
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 26
Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ..............................................26
Viewing ......................................................................................28
Erasing Images .....................................................................29
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................ 30
On/Off ..................................................................................... 30
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 31
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 31
Viewnder ............................................................................... 32
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 33
Adjusting the Screen Angle .................................................... 33
Tilting the Screen Downward ................................................. 33
Tilting the Screen Upward .....................................................33
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 34
Using the Quick Set Menu...................................................... 34
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings .............35
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 35
Touch-Screen Operations .......................................................... 36
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 37
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 38
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ...................................... 39
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 39
Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ..............................................39
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information .............................................................. 2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Lens .........................................................................................5
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 14
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 15
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 18
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 18
Removing the Strap ................................................................... 19
Holding the Camera ...................................................................19
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................19
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card ............................20
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................21
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 21
Changing the Date and Time .................................................22
Display Language ...................................................................... 23
Attaching a Lens ........................................................................ 23
Detaching a Lens ..................................................................24
Lens Instruction Manuals ......................................................24
7
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Viewing Settings ........................................................................55
Creative Zone Settings Corresponding to Creative Assist
Mode Settings .......................................................................55
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 56
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings (Self Portrait) ...........57
Enhancing Colors in Shots of Food (Food) ...............................58
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the Background
(Panning) ...................................................................................58
Shooting in Backlit Scenes (HDR Backlight Control) .................59
Image Effects (Creative Filters) .............................................. 59
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W) ..................................... 60
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................60
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 60
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect) ...................... 61
Shots Resembling Watercolors (Water Painting Effect) ............61
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........61
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............62
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................62
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........63
Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 63
Recording Movies in Movie Mode .......................................... 64
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording ........ 64
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter ......................................................65
Recording Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie) .................65
Sound Settings ..........................................................................66
Adjusting the Recording Volume ...........................................66
Deactivating the Wind Filter ..................................................67
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 67
P Mode ............................................................................. 68
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 68
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 41
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................41
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................42
Still Images ............................................................................ 42
Movies ...................................................................................42
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 43
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................44
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 44
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 44
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................45
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................45
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................46
Continuous Shooting .................................................................46
Image Customization Features .............................................. 47
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 47
Capturing in RAW Format .....................................................48
Using the Menu .....................................................................48
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 49
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................49
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 50
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level ......................................... 50
Using Auto Level ........................................................................51
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 51
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ...............................51
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ...............................51
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ........................52
Other Shooting Modes .................................................... 53
Shooting with Your Favorite Settings (Creative Assist) .......... 53
Saving/Loading Settings ............................................................ 54
Saving Settings .....................................................................54
Loading Settings ....................................................................55
Using Settings from Images ..................................................55
8
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Flash....................................................................................... 82
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................82
Auto .......................................................................................83
On ..........................................................................................83
Slow Synchro ........................................................................83
Off .......................................................................................... 83
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................83
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 84
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................84
Changing the Flash Metering Mode ..........................................84
Resetting Flash Settings ............................................................85
Other Settings ........................................................................ 85
Switching to Other Functions to Adjust with the Quick Control
Dial ............................................................................................85
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 86
Correcting Camera Shake when Shooting Movies ................86
Correcting Lens Aberrations ...................................................... 87
Lens Correction Data ............................................................87
Changing the Noise Reduction Level ........................................88
Using Multi Shot Noise Reduction ......................................... 88
Reducing Noise at Slow Shutter Speeds ...................................89
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode ............................................ 90
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 90
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 91
Depth-of-Field Preview ..............................................................91
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 92
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)............................................ 93
Adjusting the Flash Output ..................................................... 93
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ..................................................................................... 94
Customizing Controls and Display ......................................... 95
Setting Up Shooting from a Single Screen ............................. 69
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 69
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 69
Deactivating Exposure Simulation .........................................69
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................70
Changing the Metering Method .................................................70
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................71
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................71
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................71
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting
Optimizer) ..................................................................................72
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority) ..................... 72
Image Colors .......................................................................... 73
Adjusting White Balance ............................................................73
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 73
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................74
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature ............. 75
Customizing Colors (Picture Style) ............................................ 75
Customizing Picture Styles ....................................................76
Saving Customized Picture Styles ........................................77
Focusing ................................................................................. 77
Choosing the AF Method ........................................................... 77
1-point AF ..............................................................................78
+Tracking ............................................................................78
Smooth Zone AF ..................................................................78
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) ..............................79
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 79
Shooting with Servo AF .............................................................80
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................80
Fine-Tuning the Focus ...............................................................81
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 81
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................82
9
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................. 107
Navigating through Images in an Index ................................... 107
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................108
Double-Touch Magnication ................................................108
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .......................108
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images ........................109
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 110
Image Viewing Options .........................................................110
Magnifying Images .................................................................. 110
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 111
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 111
Protecting Images .................................................................112
Using the Menu ....................................................................... 112
Choosing Images Individually .............................................. 112
Selecting a Range ............................................................... 113
Protecting All Images at Once ............................................. 113
Clearing All Protection at Once ........................................... 114
Erasing Images .....................................................................114
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ............................................. 115
Choosing a Selection Method ............................................. 115
Choosing Images Individually .............................................. 115
Selecting a Range ............................................................... 115
Specifying All Images at Once ............................................. 116
Rotating Images ....................................................................116
Using the Menu ....................................................................... 116
Deactivating Auto Rotation ...................................................... 117
Rating Images (Rating) .........................................................117
Using the Menu ....................................................................... 117
Editing Still Images ................................................................ 118
Resizing Images ...................................................................... 118
Using the Menu ................................................................... 119
Cropping .................................................................................. 119
Customizing Display Information ............................................... 95
Customizing the Information Displayed ................................. 95
Conguring Touch & Drag AF ....................................................95
Changing the Settings of Touch and Drag Operations ..........96
Restricting the Area of the Screen Available for Touch and
Drag Operations ....................................................................96
Conguring Custom Functions ..................................................96
Assigning Functions to Buttons and Dials .............................97
Assigning Functions to the Quick Control Dial ......................98
Customizing the Quick Set Menu ..............................................99
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu .................................99
Rearranging Menu Items ..................................................... 100
Saving Shooting Settings ........................................................100
Settings That Can Be Saved ...............................................100
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .....101
Renaming My Menu Tabs .................................................... 102
Deleting a My Menu Tab ...................................................... 102
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items ....................................102
Customizing My Menu Tab Display .....................................102
Playback Mode .............................................................. 103
Viewing ................................................................................. 103
Touch-Screen Operations ........................................................ 104
Switching Display Modes .........................................................105
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed ................105
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) .................... 105
AF Point Display .................................................................. 105
Grid Display ......................................................................... 105
Brightness Histogram ..........................................................106
RGB Histogram ...................................................................106
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ........................................................................106
Viewing by Date ...................................................................107
10
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 143
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 144
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................144
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................144
Selecting a Range ...............................................................145
Sending Rated Images ........................................................ 145
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................146
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........146
Adding Comments ................................................................... 146
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 147
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 147
Preparing the Camera .........................................................147
Preparing the Computer ......................................................147
Sending Images .......................................................................148
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....148
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control the
Camera................................................................................. 149
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................149
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a Smartphone ............149
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi ........................................149
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth ..................................150
Editing or Erasing Wireless Settings .................................... 151
Editing Connection Information ...............................................151
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................151
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................152
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones .................152
Changing the Camera Nickname ........................................153
Returning the Wireless Settings to Default .............................. 153
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via Bluetooth .............154
Applying Filter Effects .............................................................. 120
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................121
Processing RAW Images with the Camera .......................... 122
Using the Menu .......................................................................123
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................123
Selecting a Range ...............................................................124
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 124
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 125
Editing Digest Movies .............................................................. 126
Wireless Features ......................................................... 127
Available Wireless Features ................................................. 127
Using Wi-Fi Features ............................................................... 127
Using Bluetooth
®
Features ......................................................127
Transferring Images to a Smartphone .................................. 128
Transferring Images to a Bluetooth Enabled Smartphone ...... 128
Transferring Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone ....... 130
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Shooting Mode ...130
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 131
Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu ....................132
Using Another Access Point ....................................................134
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 134
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................134
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................135
Previous Access Points .......................................................136
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 136
Registering Web Services .......................................................136
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................137
Registering Other Web Services .........................................138
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................139
Viewing Images Using a Media Player ................................. 140
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 141
11
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Accessories ................................................................... 165
System Map ......................................................................... 166
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 167
Lenses .....................................................................................167
Power Supplies ........................................................................167
Flash Units ...............................................................................168
Microphone .............................................................................. 168
Other Accessories ...................................................................168
Printers ....................................................................................169
Photo and Movie Storage ........................................................ 169
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 169
Playback on a TV ....................................................................169
Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 170
Shooting Remotely ..................................................................171
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately) ..............................171
Using the Hot Shoe .................................................................171
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) ..............................172
Setting External Flash Functions .........................................172
Setting External Flash Custom Functions ...........................174
Restoring External Flash Defaults ....................................... 174
Using External Microphones (Sold Separately) .......................174
Using the Software ............................................................... 176
Software ..................................................................................176
Software Instruction Manual .................................................... 176
Checking Your Computer Environment ...................................176
Installing the Software .............................................................176
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 177
Printing Images .................................................................... 178
Easy Print ................................................................................178
Setting Menu .................................................................. 155
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 155
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 155
File Numbering ........................................................................155
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 156
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 156
Changing the Video System ....................................................157
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 157
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 157
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................157
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................158
Screen Brightness ...................................................................158
Switching the Color of Screen Information ..............................158
World Clock .............................................................................159
Date and Time .........................................................................159
Display Language .................................................................... 159
Muting Camera Sounds ........................................................... 159
Activating Camera Sounds ...................................................... 160
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................160
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon ...............................................160
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel ..........................................160
Cleaning the Image Sensor ..................................................... 161
Disabling Auto Cleaning ......................................................161
Activating Sensor Cleaning .................................................161
Cleaning the Sensor Manually ............................................162
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 162
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................162
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................163
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 163
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 163
Restoring All Camera Defaults ............................................163
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions ......................... 164
12
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Info Display 8 .......................................................................193
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................193
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 194
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................194
Quick Set Menu .......................................................................196
Shooting Tab ............................................................................198
C.Fn Tab ..................................................................................206
INFO. Quick Control ................................................................208
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 209
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................209
Playback Tab ...........................................................................210
Quick Set Menu in Playback Mode ..........................................210
Handling Precautions ............................................................211
Specications ....................................................................... 212
Type .....................................................................................212
Image Sensor ......................................................................212
Focus Control ......................................................................212
Exposure Control .................................................................212
White Balance .....................................................................212
Shutter ................................................................................. 213
Flash ....................................................................................213
Viewnder/Monitor ............................................................... 213
Shooting ..............................................................................213
Recording ............................................................................214
Playback .............................................................................. 215
Customizing .........................................................................215
Power ..................................................................................216
Interface ..............................................................................216
Operating Environment .......................................................216
Dimensions (CIPA compliant) .............................................. 216
Weight (CIPA compliant) ......................................................216
Battery Pack LP-E17 ...........................................................216
Battery Charger LC-E17/ LC-E17E .....................................217
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 179
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................179
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............180
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 180
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................180
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 181
Movie Printing Options ........................................................181
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................181
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................182
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................182
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 183
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................183
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................183
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................183
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................183
Adding Images Individually ..................................................184
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................184
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................184
Appendix ........................................................................ 185
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 185
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 189
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 191
When Shooting ........................................................................ 191
Battery Level .......................................................................191
During Playback ......................................................................192
Info Display 1 .......................................................................192
Info Display 2 .......................................................................192
Info Display 3 .......................................................................192
Info Display 4 .......................................................................192
Info Display 5 .......................................................................193
Info Display 6 .......................................................................193
Info Display 7 .......................................................................193
13
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Index..................................................................................... 218
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or
Others).................................................................................220
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ................................. 220
Security Precautions ...........................................................220
Third-Party Software ...........................................................221
Personal Information and Security Precautions ..................221
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................221
Disclaimer ............................................................................222
14
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
- =
39, =
41
● Shoot with effects of your choice (Creative Assist)
- =
53
● Blur the background / Keep the background in sharp focus (Av Mode)
- =
91
● Freeze the action / Blur the action (Tv Mode)
- =
90
● Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
- =
57
● Apply special effects (Creative Filters)
- =
59
● Shoot several shots at once (Continuous)
- =
46
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
- =
39
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
- =
44
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
- =
103
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
- =
111
● On a TV
- =
169
● On a computer
- =
176
● Browse through images quickly
- =
107
● Erase images
- =
114
Record/View Movies
● Record movies
- =
39, =
64
● View movies (Playback Mode)
- =
103
Print
● Print pictures
- =
178
Save
● Save images to a computer
- =
177
Use Wireless Features
● Send images to a smartphone
- =
128
● Share images online
- =
136
● Send images to a computer
- =
147
15
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not re the ash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
The hot shoe cover is dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs, contact a
doctor immediately.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
● If your model has a viewnder or interchangeable lens, do not look
through the viewnder or lens at bright light sources (such as the sun
on a clear day, or a bright articial light source).
This may damage your eyesight.
● If your model has an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens (or
the camera with the lens attached) in the sun without the lens cap on.
This could result in a re.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
16
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
17
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
18
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Basic Guide
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
1
Prepare the strap.
● Pull the cap in the direction of (1) while
holding the ring.
● Rotate the ring in the direction of (2).
2
Attach the ring.
● Pass the end of the ring through the
holder as shown.
3
Turn the ring around.
● Rotate the ring in the direction of (1).
● When rotating the ring, be careful not to
pass the strap through the gap in the ring.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
19
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Holding the Camera
● Place the strap around your neck.
● When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
● Remove the cover from the battery pack,
align the marks on the battery pack
and charger, and insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
● LC-E17: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
● LC-E17E: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
● The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
● When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
LC-E17
LC-E17E
4
Secure the ring.
● To secure the ring, slide the cap in the
direction of (1) until it clicks into place.
● On the other side of the camera, secure
the ring the same way.
● Always follow these steps to attach the strap correctly. If the strap
is not attached correctly, the camera may fall.
Removing the Strap
1
Unfasten the cap.
● Pull the cap in the direction of (1) to
unfasten it from the ring.
2
Detach the ring.
● Rotate the ring in the direction of (1).
● Pass the end of the ring (by the gap) out
of the holder to detach the ring.
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
20
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
3
Remove the battery pack.
● After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
● Battery charger problems may trigger a protective circuit that
stops charging and makes the charge lamp blink in orange. If this
happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from the power
outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach the battery pack to the
charger again and wait a while before connecting the charger to a
power outlet again.
● For details on charging time, see “Battery Charger LC-E17/
LC-E17E” (=
217), and for the number of shots and recording
time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Power”
(=
216).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(=
156).
1
Open the cover.
● Slide the cover (1) and open it (2).
2
Insert the battery pack.
● With the battery pack terminals (1) in
the position shown, hold the battery lock
toward (2) and insert the battery pack
until the lock clicks shut.
● If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
● Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
● Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
● Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
21
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
4
Close the cover.
● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
● You can check the number of shots and recording time per
memory card in the information displayed (=
26).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
● Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
● The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
● Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
● The memory card will pop up.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Set the date and time.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date and time.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
22
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the [ 2] tab.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the date and time.
● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (=
21) to adjust the settings.
● Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours, even if the
camera is off, once you insert a charged battery pack, or when
you insert a DC coupler and connect an AC adapter (both sold
separately, =
167).
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=
21).
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
● To turn off the camera, move the power
switch to [
].
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [
] dial.
● You can also set the date and time by touching the desired item
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [
][ ], followed
by [
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
touching [
][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [ ].
23
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
● Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 3] tab.
● You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
Attaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with EF-M lenses. Additionally, the optional
Mount Adapter EF-EOS M can be attached to use EF and EF-S lenses
(=
24).
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Remove the caps.
● Remove the lens cap and body cap by
turning them in the directions shown.
3
Attach the lens.
● Align the mount indexes (the white dots)
on the lens and camera, and then turn
the lens in the direction shown until it
clicks into place.
4
Remove the front lens cap.
5
Prepare to shoot.
● With the lens retraction index aligned
with the zoom position index, hold the
lens retraction switch toward [ ] as you
turn the zoom ring a little in the direction
shown, and then release the switch.
● Continue turning the zoom ring until it
clicks, indicating that the lens is ready for
shooting.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
24
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
● To retract the lens, hold the lens
retraction switch toward [ ] as you turn
the zoom ring. Align the lens retraction
index with the zoom position index, and
then release the switch.
● To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your ngers.
●
If you want to zoom, do it before focusing.
Turning the zoom ring after achieving
focus may throw off the focus slightly.
● To protect the lens, keep the lens cap on when the camera is not
in use.
●
Some lenses may cause vignetting if the built-in ash is used.
Detaching a Lens
● Make sure the camera is off.
● Hold down the lens release button (1) as
you turn the lens in the direction shown
(2).
● Turn the lens until it stops, and then
remove it in the direction shown (3).
● Attach the lens cap to the lens after
removal.
(
3
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
● Minimizing Dust
- When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal
dust.
- When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to
attach the body cap to the camera.
- Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
●
Since the image sensor size is smaller than the 35mm lm format,
it will look like the lens focal length is increased by approx. 1.6x.
For example, the focal length of a 15-45mm lens is approximately
equivalent to a focal length of 24-72mm on a 35mm camera.
Lens Instruction Manuals
Download lens manuals from the following page.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
Attaching EF and EF-S Lenses
To use EF and EF-S lenses, attach the optional Mount Adapter
EF-EOS M.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Remove the caps.
● Follow step 2 in “Attaching a Lens”
(=
23) to remove the caps.
25
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
3
Attach the lens to the adapter.
● To mount an EF lens, align the red dots
on the lens and adapter, and then turn
the lens in the direction shown until it
clicks into place.
● To mount an EF-S lens, align the white
squares on the lens and adapter, and
then turn the lens in the direction shown
until it clicks into place.
4
Attach the adapter to the camera.
● Align the mount indexes (the white dots)
on the adapter and camera, and then
turn the lens in the direction shown until it
clicks into place.
● When holding or carrying a camera with a lens that is heavier
than the camera, support the lens.
● Adapters may extend the minimum focusing distance or affect the
maximum magnication or shooting range of the lens.
● If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during
autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.
● The focus preset and power zoom features of some super
telephoto lenses are not supported.
Detaching a Lens
1
Detach the adapter.
● Make sure the camera is off.
● Hold down the lens release button and
turn the adapter (with the lens attached)
in the direction shown.
● Turn the adapter until it stops, then
detach it.
2
Detach the lens.
● Hold down the lens release lever
on the adapter and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
● Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
● Attach the lens cap to the lens after
removal.
Using a Tripod
When using a tripod while the adapter is attached to the camera, use the
tripod mount included with the adapter. Do not use the camera’s tripod
socket.
● Attach the tripod mount to the adapter.
Turn the tripod mount knob to ensure that
it is securely attached.
● Attach the tripod to the tripod mount
socket.
● With EF lenses that incorporate a tripod mount (such as super
telephoto lenses), attach the tripod to the tripod mount on the
lens.
26
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Using Lens Image Stabilization
Correct camera shake by using a lens with built-in image stabilization.
Lenses with built-in image stabilization are named with “IS”.
● Slide the image stabilization switch on the
lens to [ON].
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
● A scene icon (1) is displayed in the upper
left of the screen.
● Also shown on the top of the screen are
the number of shots (2) and length of
movies (3) that the card can hold.
● Frames are displayed around faces
and subjects that have been detected,
indicating that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
● When using a zoom lens, zoom by
turning the zoom ring on the lens with
your ngers.
27
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed, press
the [
] button to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot. (In low-light conditions, the ash
res automatically when you have raised
it.)
● Your shot remains displayed on the
screen for about two seconds.
● Even while the shot is displayed, you can
take another shot by pressing the shutter
button again.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
● Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the
elapsed time.
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● If the camera cannot focus on subjects when you press the
shutter button lightly, an orange AF frame is displayed with [
],
and no picture is taken if you press the shutter button all the way
down.
● Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
are enlarged.
28
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
● Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
● Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
● To adjust the volume, press the [
][ ]
buttons during playback.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (=
31), press the [ ] button or movie
button, or turn the mode dial.
● You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
29
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (=
115).
● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
30
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
On/Off
Shooting Mode
● Slide the power switch to [ ] to turn the
camera on in Shooting mode.
● To turn off the camera, move the power
switch to [
].
Playback Mode
● Hold down the [ ] button and slide the
power switch to [ ] to turn the camera
on in Playback mode.
● To switch to Shooting mode, press the
[
] button again.
● To turn off the camera, move the power
switch to [
].
● When an EF-M lens is attached to the camera and the power is
off, the aperture narrows to reduce the amount of light entering
the camera and protect the internal components of the camera.
Accordingly, the camera makes a small noise when turned on or
off as the aperture is adjusted.
● The sensor is cleaned when the camera is turned on or off, which
may also make a small noise. Even when the camera is off, [
]
is displayed as the sensor is cleaned. However, the [
] icon
may not be displayed if you switch the camera on and off quickly
in succession.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (=
31), press the [ ] button or movie
button, or turn the mode dial.
31
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
● As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically
deactivates the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a
specic period of inactivity.
● The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity, and the camera turns itself off after about another minute. To
activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off,
press the shutter button halfway (=
31).
● If the screen goes off in Playback mode, you can also access the
shooting screen by pressing the shutter button halfway.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (=
158).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (=
127), or when connected to a computer
(=
177).
Shutter Button
To ensure that the subject is in focus, begin by holding the shutter button
halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all the
way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
● The camera now shoots.
● Subjects may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
32
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Viewnder
Shooting is easier with a viewnder, which helps you concentrate on
keeping subjects in focus.
1
Switch between using the screen
and viewnder as needed.
● Moving the viewnder near your eye will
activate its display and deactivate the
camera screen.
● Moving the viewnder away from your
eye will deactivate its display and activate
the camera screen.
2
Adjust the diopter.
● Move the knob to bring viewnder images
into sharp focus.
● The viewnder display and camera screen cannot be activated at
the same time.
● Although the viewnder is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels may
be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not
indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
● Some aspect ratio settings (=
49) will cause black bars to be
displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the
screen. These areas will not be recorded.
● The screen will not be activated when you move your eye away
from the viewnder if you have selected MENU (=
35) > [ 1]
tab > [Display settings] > [Display Control] > [Manual] and then
[Manual display] > [Viewnder].
● Display of shooting information will not be adjusted when you
hold the camera vertically if you have selected MENU (=
35) >
[
1] tab > [Shooting information display] > [VF vertical display]
> [Off].
● You can conserve battery power in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[
] mode by selecting MENU (=
35) > [ 2] tab > [Display
Mode] > [Display priority] > [Power Saving], but viewnder and
screen display may be choppier.
● Display switches to the camera screen if you access the Wi-Fi
menu (=
127) during viewnder display.
● You can congure display brightness (=
158) for the viewnder
and camera screen separately.
● To reduce the shooting screen, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 2]
tab > [VF display format] > [Display 2].
33
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode. As you turn it, hold
down the mode dial release button in the middle of the dial.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(4)
(1) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (=
64,
=
94). You can also shoot
movies when the mode dial is
not set to Movie mode, simply by
pressing the movie button.
(2) Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
when shooting (=
59).
(3) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specic scenes (=
56).
(4) P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (=
68,
=
90, =
91, =
92,
=
100).
(5) Scene Intelligent Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
39,
=
41).
(6) Creative Assist Mode
Preview easy-to-understand
image adjustments when shooting.
Settings can also be saved and
applied again later (=
53).
● You can turn the mode dial to switch to Shooting mode from
Playback mode.
Adjusting the Screen Angle
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
Tilting the Screen Downward
● The screen can be opened to about 180°.
● When including yourself in shots, you
can view a mirror image of yourself by
rotating the screen around toward the
front of the camera.
Tilting the Screen Upward
● Lift the bottom of the screen up toward
you.
● The screen can be opened to about 85°.
● When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
● Do not force the screen open too far, which may damage the
camera.
● To cancel reverse display, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 1] tab >
[Reverse Display] > [Off].
34
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to show or hide shooting information, grid lines,
or the electronic level.
To congure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab >
[Shooting information display] (=
95).
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(=
105).
Using the Quick Set Menu
Congure commonly used functions in the (Quick Set) menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(=
196) or playback mode (=
210).
1
Access the menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
● Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
or [ ] dial to choose an option.
● Items labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
4
Conrm your choice and exit.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
35
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● You can also choose an option in step 3 by turning the [ ]
dial.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (=
163).
● You can also exit by choosing [
] in the menu items and
pressing the [
] button.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure
Settings
● Touch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
● Touch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
● To return to the previous screen, touch
the [
] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
● You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a tab.
● Tabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([
]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identied in this
manual by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
3
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
● For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
● To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
36
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Choose an option.
● When options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
● When options are listed horizontally,
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
5
Conrm your choice and exit.
● Press the [ ] button to conrm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
● Press the [
] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● You can also choose function tabs by pressing the [ ] button
in step 2.
● You can also choose an item or option in steps 3 and 4 by turning
the [
] dial.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (=
163).
● Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (=
198 – =
210).
Touch-Screen Operations
● To choose tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
● Touch an item to choose it, and then touch it again.
● Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
● To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. To return to the previous
screen, touch [
].
● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
● Touching [
], [ ], or [ ] has the same effect as pressing the
[ ], [ ], or [ ] buttons, respectively.
● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
37
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
● Press the [ ] button.
● For some functions, [ ] is not displayed and cannot be used.
● Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [
][ ] dials to select characters or
icons, and then pressing the [
] button. You can also move the
cursor by turning the [
] dial. To return to the previous screen,
press the [
] button.
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter wireless settings (=
127) and other
information. Note that the length and type of information you can enter
varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
● Touch the characters to enter them.
● The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
● Touch [ ][ ].
Entering Line Breaks
● Touch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
● To switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[ ].
● Touch [
] to enter capital letters.
● Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
● Touch [ ] to delete the previous
character.
● Touching and holding [
] will delete ve
characters at a time.
(
1
)
38
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (=
4) blinks in green at these
times.
● Connected to a computer (=
177)
● Display off (=
31, =
157, =
158)
● Starting up, recording, or reading
● Communicating with other devices
● Shooting long exposures (=
90, =
92)
● Connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
39
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
Shooting with
Camera-Determined Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
● A scene icon is displayed in the upper left
of the screen (=
43).
● Frames are displayed around faces
and subjects that have been detected,
indicating that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
● When using a zoom lens, zoom by
turning the zoom ring on the lens with
your ngers.
40
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed, press
the [
] button to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot. (In low-light conditions, the ash
res automatically when you have raised
it.)
● Your shot remains displayed on the
screen for about two seconds.
● Even while the shot is displayed, you can
take another shot by pressing the shutter
button again.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
● Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the
elapsed time.
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3. However, note that
the sound of camera operations will be
recorded.
● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
3) Finish recording.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
41
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Scene
Intelligent Auto)” (=
39) and choose
[ ].
2
Compose the shot.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Scene
Intelligent Auto)” (=
39) to compose
the shot and focus.
● For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3
Shoot.
● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Scene
Intelligent Auto)” (=
39) to shoot a still
image.
● The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
● Any sounds and vibrations from your camera or lens operations
will be recorded in digest movies.
● Digest movie image quality is [ ] for NTSC or
[
] for PAL. This varies depending on the video output
format (=
157).
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer.
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (=
112).
- Daylight saving time (=
21), video system (=
157), time
zone (=
159), or copyright information (=
162) settings are
changed.
- A new folder is created (=
155).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (=
35) > [ 6] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills] (=
35).
● Individual chapters can be edited (=
126).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (=
106).
42
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Vignetting appears in previews immediately after your shots,
before the nal, saved images are displayed.
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(=
52).
Movies
● The camera may become warm when recording movies
repeatedly over an extended period. This does not indicate
damage.
● Keep your ngers away from the microphone (1) while recording
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being
recorded or may cause the recording to sound mufed.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button and
touch-screen panel when recording movies, because sounds
made by the camera will be recorded. To adjust settings or
perform other operations during recording, use the touch-screen
panel if possible.
● Mechanical sounds from the lens and camera are also recorded.
These sounds may be less noticeable if you use an optional
external microphone (=
174).
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, adjust the image stabilization setting (=
86).
(
1
)
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down the [
] button. To activate
sounds, press the [
] button, choose [Beep] on the [ 3]
tab, and then press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [On].
Still Images
● If the camera cannot focus on subjects when you press the
shutter button halfway, an orange AF frame is displayed with [
],
and no picture is taken if you press the shutter button all the way
down.
● Focusing may take longer or be incorrect when no people or other
subjects are detected, when subjects are dark or lack contrast, or
in very bright conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the
subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash” (=
213).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
● Vignetting or dark image areas may occur with some lenses if the
ash res.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
43
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Background
When Shooting Other Subjects
Icon
Background
Color
Other
Subjects
In Motion
At Close
Range
Bright
Gray
Bright and Backlit
With Blue Sky
Light Blue
Blue Sky and
Backlit
Sunsets – – Orange
Spotlights
–
Dark BlueDark
Dark, Using Tripod – –
● “In Motion” icons are not displayed when you shoot with the self-timer
(=
44) or in [ ] mode, or when you record a movie.
● “When Shooting People” and “In Motion” icons are not displayed when
you have set the lens to [MF] or you are using a non-autofocus lens.
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (=
68) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
● During movie recording, lens operating noises from auto focusing
may also be recorded. Lens noises may be less noticeable if you
use an optional external microphone. If you prefer not to record
sound, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 7] tab > [Sound recording]
> [Disable].
● To keep the focus xed during movie recording, choose MENU
(=
35) > [ 7] tab > [Movie Servo AF] > [Disable].
● Individual movies that exceed 4 GB are divided into multiple les.
To notify you about 30 sec. before the movie reaches 4 GB, the
elapsed time on the recording screen will start ashing. If you
continue shooting and exceed 4 GB, the camera automatically
creates a new movie le and ashing stops. Note that automatic
playback of divided movie les one after another is not supported.
Play each movie separately.
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Background
When Shooting People Icon
Background
Color
People In Motion
Bright
Gray
Bright and Backlit
With Blue Sky
Light Blue
Blue Sky and Backlit
Spotlights –
Dark BlueDark
–
Dark, Using Tripod
–
44
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Common, Convenient Features
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
34).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
● For Movies: Press the movie button.
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
A variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you
are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
detected as the main subject. Frames follow moving subjects within a
certain range as they are tracked to keep them in focus.
● Frames turn green after you press the shutter button halfway and the
camera focuses.
● Frames turn blue and focus and brightness are readjusted using Servo
AF if you press the shutter button halfway when subject motion is
detected in [
] mode.
● An orange frame is displayed with [
] if the camera cannot focus on
subjects when you press the shutter button halfway.
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (=
68) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
● To turn off Servo AF, set [AF auto switch] to [Disable] on the
[
6] tab. Note that “In Motion” icons (=
43) will no longer be
displayed. [AF auto switch] is automatically set to [Disable] and
cannot be changed when the self-timer (=
44) is set to an
option other than [
].
● To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [
] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode.
45
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button twice.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
44) to shoot.
● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specied delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
44) and choose [ ].
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
44) to shoot.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
44), choose [ ] and press the
[ ] button.
46
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Shooting” (=
213).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] or [ ]
(=
34).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] or
[ ] is displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch
Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1
Enable the touch-shutter function.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Choose [Touch Shutter], and then choose
[Enable].
2
Shoot.
● Touch the subject on the screen to take
the picture.
● To cancel touch shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
● An orange AF frame indicates that the camera could not focus on
subjects. No shot will be taken.
● Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [
].
47
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Image Customization Features
Changing Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 7 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
(=
48). For guidelines on how many of each kind of image can t on a
memory card, see “Recording” (=
214).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
34).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
● [ ] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [
] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more t on a memory card. Note
that [
]-size images are of [ ] quality.
● Not available in [
] mode.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
1] tab > [Image quality].
● During continuous shooting, focus is locked at the position
determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (=
44).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● There may be a delay before you can shoot again, depending
on shooting conditions, the type of memory card, and how many
shots you took continuously.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● With Touch Shutter (=
46), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus during continuous shooting
remains constant, after it is determined for the rst shot.
● Screen display in continuous shooting differs from the images
actually captured and may look out of focus. Some lenses may
also darken the continuous shooting screen display, but images
are captured with standard brightness.
● When nine or fewer shots can be taken continuously, the number
available is shown to the right of the total remaining shots on
the top of the screen (=
191). It is not shown when 10 or more
shots can be taken.
● Fewer continuous shots may be available under some shooting
conditions or camera settings.
48
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software “EOS Utility” (=
176).
● For details on the relationship between the number of recording
pixels and the number of shots that will t on a card, see
“Recording” (=
214).
● The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension
for RAW images is .CR2. File names of JPEG and RAW images
captured together have the same image number.
● For details on Digital Photo Professional and EOS Utility
applications, see “Software” (=
176). Download software
instruction manuals from the Canon website as needed. For
downloading instructions, see “Software Instruction Manual”
(=
176).
Using the Menu
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
35).
● To capture in RAW format at the same
time, turn the [
] dial and choose
[ ] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [JPEG], and then choose
the image size and quality. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
● When nished, press the [
] button to
return to the menu screen.
● [RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
Capturing in RAW Format
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
JPEG
Images
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality and
compressed to reduce le size. However, the compression
process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to
their original, unprocessed state. Image processing may
also cause some loss of image quality.
RAW
Images
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing.
The data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a
computer or printing. You must rst process it on this
camera (=
122) or use the Digital Photo Professional
application (=
176) to convert images to ordinary JPEG
or TIFF les. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image quality.
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
34).
● To capture in RAW format only, choose
the [
] option.
● To capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[
] button. A [ ] mark is displayed
next to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow
the same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
49
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (=
157). For guidelines
on the total recording time for movies at each level of image quality that
will t on a memory card, see “Recording” (=
214).
● Press the [
] button, choose [Movie rec.
size] in the menu, and choose the desired
option (=
34).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
For NTSC Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 59.94 fps
For shooting in Full HD.
[ ] enables a
cinematic frame rate.
1920 x 1080 29.97 fps
1920 x 1080 23.98 fps
1280 x 720 59.94 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 29.97 fps
For shooting in standard
denition.
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
34).
● Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, equivalent to 35mm lm.
Used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
1] tab > [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
50
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Helpful Shooting Features
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
1
Display the electronic level.
● Press the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
2
Straighten the camera.
● (1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
● If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, check the setting
in MENU (=
35) > [ 1] tab > [Shooting information display]
(=
95).
● The electronic level is not displayed in [
] mode or during
movie recording.
● If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
● Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (=
157).
For PAL Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 50.00 fps
For shooting in Full HD.
1920 x 1080 25.00 fps
1280 x 720 50.00 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 25.00 fps
For shooting in standard
denition.
● Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [ ] and
[
] modes and on the top and bottom in [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[
] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
7] tab > [Movie rec. size].
51
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(=
35).
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[AF-assist beam (LED) ring] on the
[ 3] tab, and then choose [Disable].
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Enable].
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash Control] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
35).
Using Auto Level
Still Images
Movies
Auto leveling keeps movies straight.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
35).
● Choose [Enable], and press the [
]
button again (=
35).
● When you set [Digital IS] to [Enable] or [Enhanced] (=
86),
[
Auto level] is set to [Disable] and cannot be changed.
● Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
are enlarged (=
86).
52
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Red-eye reduc.], and then
choose [Off] (=
35).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
Still Images
Movies
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Image review] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [2 sec.].
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
● By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information.
53
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with
unique image effects or captured using special functions
Shooting with Your Favorite
Settings (Creative Assist)
Capture shots just as you imagine them, without having to know
photography terms. Choose from easy-to-understand options to defocus
the background, adjust brightness, or customize shots in other ways as
you watch the screen. Once you save the settings you like, it’s easy to
apply them again later. You can also apply settings from past images
captured in [ ] mode.
This mode makes it easier to learn about Creative Zone shooting modes
([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]), because you can check the corresponding
settings in these modes when viewing images shot in [ ] mode.
Customize shots in these ways.
Background
Adjust the appearance of the background. Choose
higher values to make backgrounds sharper, or
lower values to make them blurrier.
Brightness
Adjust image brightness. Choose higher values to
brighten images.
Contrast
Adjust contrast. Choose higher values to increase
the contrast.
Saturation
Adjust the vividness of colors. Choose higher values
to make colors more vivid, or lower values to make
them subdued.
Color tone
Adjust color tone. Choose higher values to make
colors warmer, or lower values to make them cooler.
Monochrome
Choose from ve monochrome options: [ B/W],
[ Sepia], [ Blue], [ Purple], or [ Green]. Set to
[ ] to shoot in color. Note that [Saturation] and
[Color tone] are not available with options other than
[ ].
54
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Saving/Loading Settings
Save your favorite settings and use them again as needed.
Saving Settings
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Shooting with
Your Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”
(=
53) to choose [ ] and congure
the settings as desired.
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then choose
a prole to save the settings to, either by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ][ ] dials.
● You can save setting in up to six proles.
● [
Compare] is displayed if you have
already assigned the selected prole.
With this prole selected, you can press
the [ ] button to view the previous
settings and compare them to your new
settings.
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[OK] after the conrmation message, and
then press the [ ] button.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the settings.
● Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose an item,
and then adjust the setting, either by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ][ ] dials (=
34).
● Once you are nished adjusting each
item, press the [
] button to return
to the shooting screen.
3
Shoot.
● [Background] is not available when the ash is used.
● Setting options labeled with [ ] on the shooting screen can
be adjusted by turning the [
] dial. By pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, you can also move [
] to switch to another option for
adjustment.
● To prevent your settings from being reset when the camera is
turned off, set [Keep
setting] on the [ 6] tab to [Enable].
● You can also access the setting screen by touching [ ] in the
upper right, and you can touch items on the setting screen to
adjust them. Touch [
] to return to the shooting screen.
55
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Viewing Settings
● To check the settings of images you view
that were captured in [ ] mode, press
the [ ] button. The screen at left is
displayed.
Creative Zone Settings Corresponding to Creative
Assist Mode Settings
[ ] Mode Setting
Creative Zone Setting
(A) Background
(a) Aperture value (=
91)
(B) Brightness
(b) Exposure compensation (=
69)
However, in ash shots, corresponds to (b’), ash
exposure compensation (=
83)
(C) Color tone
(c) White balance correction (=
73)
(D) Contrast
(d) Picture Style contrast (=
76)
(E) Saturation
(e) Picture Style saturation (=
76)
(F) Monochrome
(f) Picture Style
lter and toning effect
(=
76)
Loading Settings
● Follow step 1 in “Shooting with Your
Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”
(=
53) and choose [ ].
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then choose
a prole to load, either by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ][ ]
dials.
● Press the [
] button to apply the saved
settings.
● To return without applying settings,
choose [–] and press the [
] button.
Using Settings from Images
Load settings from images captured in [ ] mode to use them when
shooting.
● Follow step 1 in “Shooting with Your
Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”
(=
53) and choose [ ].
● Press the [
] button to enter Playback
mode, and then choose an image
captured in [ ] mode to display it.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and press the [
] button again.
● The settings are applied, and the camera
enters Shooting mode.
● Settings cannot be applied when the mode dial is set to a mode
other than [
]. A message is displayed if this is attempted, and
the camera remains in Playback mode. To apply settings, set the
mode dial to [
].
● [
] is not displayed for images shot in modes other than [ ]
mode.
56
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Close-ups (Close-up)
Still Images
Movies
● Take close-ups of owers or other small
objects to enlarge them in your shots.
● To make small things appear much larger,
use a macro lens (sold separately).
● Check the minimum focusing distance
of the attached lens to determine how
close to subjects you can shoot. The lens
minimum focusing distance is measured
from the [
] (focal plane) mark on the
top of the camera to the subject.
Moving Subjects (Sports)
Still Images
Movies
● Shoot continuously as the camera keeps
the subject in focus.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images
Movies
● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
● A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(=
34).
3
Shoot.
● You can also choose a shooting mode by touching [ ] in the
upper left after you set the mode dial to [
].
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
● Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Landscapes (Landscape)
Still Images
Movies
● Capture wide-open landscapes or similar
scenery in sharp focus from near to far,
with blue skies and greenery reproduced
vividly.
57
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
3
Congure the setting.
● On the screen, touch the icon of the
setting to congure.
● Choose the desired option.
● To return to the previous screen, touch
[
].
4
Shoot.
Item Details
Choose from [ ] or one of ve levels of background
defocusing.
Choose from ve levels of brightness.
Choose from ve levels of skin smoothing. Skin smoothing is
optimized for the main subject’s face.
To use touch shutter, choose [ ].
● Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on
the shooting conditions.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● In [ ] ash mode, [ ] is set to [ ] and cannot be changed.
● In [
] mode, the time left before shooting is shown on the top of
the screen when you activate the self-timer by selecting [
], or
by selecting [
] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] and [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (=
71) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ] mode
instead of [
] mode will give better results (=
39).
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings (Self
Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand
out.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Open the screen.
● Open the screen as shown.
58
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Shoot.
● Before shooting, press the shutter button
halfway as you move the camera so that
it follows the subject.
● Keep the moving subject in the frame
displayed, and press the shutter button all
the way down.
● Even after you have pressed the shutter
button fully, continue moving the camera
to follow the subject.
● Subject blurring is not reduced unless the lens is compatible with
[
] mode, but shutter speed is adjusted automatically to match
the effect level.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● In bright scenes, it may not be possible to apply the effect at your
specied level.
● To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] dial.
● You can move the frame by dragging it or touching the screen.
● For best results, hold the camera securely in both hands, with
your elbows close to your body, and rotate your whole body to
follow the subject.
● This feature is more effective for subjects moving horizontally,
such as cars or trains.
Enhancing Colors in Shots of Food (Food)
Still Images
Movies
Adjust color tones to make food look fresh and vibrant.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Change the color tone.
● Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the color
tone.
3
Shoot.
● These color tones may not look suitable when applied to people.
● In ash shots, color tones are automatically set to the default
setting.
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the
Background (Panning)
Still Images
Movies
By panning, you can blur the background to convey a sense of speed.
Attaching a lens compatible with [ ] mode enables detection and
correction of subject blurring, which helps keep subjects clear and sharp.
For details on lenses compatible with [ ] mode, visit the Canon website.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
56) and choose [ ].
59
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(=
34).
3
Shoot.
● You can also choose a shooting mode by touching [ ] in the
upper left after you set the mode dial to [
].
Shooting in Backlit Scenes (HDR Backlight
Control)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the loss of
detail in shadows that tends to occur in shots with mixed bright and dark
image areas.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
● Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
● Subjects are displayed larger than in other modes.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this
case, also disable image stabilization (=
86).
● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
60
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
Still Images
Movies
Take monochrome pictures with a gritty, rough feeling.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
61
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Make subjects look more substantial, like subjects in oil paintings.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Shots Resembling Watercolors (Water Painting
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Soften colors, for photos resembling watercolor paintings.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
62
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for
One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To move the frame, press the [
][ ] buttons
again. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie quality varies depending on the video system (=
157)
and still image aspect ratio (=
49).
- With [NTSC], movie quality is [
] for an aspect ratio of
[
].
- With [PAL], movie quality is [
] for an aspect ratio of
[
].
● You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
● A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
] button to resize the
frame, and press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
63
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Adding Artistic Effects
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
● Turn the [
] dial to choose an effect.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic
Range)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the
washed-out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in
high-contrast shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Shoot.
● Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this
case, also disable image stabilization (=
86).
● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
64
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● You can lock the focus during recording by touching [ ]. [ ]
is then displayed.
● To switch between recording with auto focus and a xed focus,
touch [
] on the screen before or during recording. (Auto
focus is indicated by a green [
] in the upper left of the [ ]
icon.) Note that this icon is not displayed when [Movie Servo AF]
(=
42) is set to [Disable] on the [ 8] tab of the menu.
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before
Recording
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in
1/3-stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
● Press the [
] button to lock the
exposure. To unlock the exposure, press
the [ ] button again.
● Turn the exposure compensation dial to
adjust the exposure, as you watch the
screen.
● You can also lock or unlock the exposure by touching [ ].
● During recording, you can also adjust exposure by touching the
exposure compensation bar on the bottom of the screen and then
touching [
][ ].
● The amount that exposure is adjusted by touching the screen
differs from the amount set by using the exposure compensation
dial. Check the image displayed.
Recording Movies in Movie Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
34).
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
194).
3
Shoot.
● Press the movie button.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● In [ ] mode, the image display area narrows and subjects are
enlarged.
● To readjust the focus and exposure while recording a movie,
press the shutter button halfway. (The camera will not beep.)
65
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Recording Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Movies
Time-lapse movies combine images that are shot automatically at a
specied interval. Any gradual changes of the subject (such as changes in
a landscape) are played back in fast motion. You can adjust the shooting
interval and number of shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
34).
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Congure movie settings.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose an item. Choose
the desired option, and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Secure the camera.
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
● To start recording, press the movie
button.
● Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
● To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
● The camera operates in Eco mode
(=
157) while shooting.
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Still Images
Movies
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ 8]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
(=
35).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
● Auto Slow Shutter is available for [ ], [ ],
[
], and [ ] movies.
66
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Adjusting the Recording Volume
Although the recording level (volume) is automatically adjusted, you can
set the level manually to suit the shooting scene.
1
Access the [Sound recording]
screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Sound recording] on the [ 8] tab, and
then press the [ ] button (=
35).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Sound recording], press the
[ ] button, choose [Manual] on the next
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
] button to choose [Rec.
level], and then press the [ ] button. On
the next screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the level, and
then press the [ ] button.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Auto].
Item Details
Shooting scene Choose from four types of scenes.
Interval/ Shots
Choose the shooting interval (in seconds) and total
number of shots.
Exposure
Choose whether exposure is determined by the rst
shot or adjusted for each shot.
Review image Display the previous shot for up to 2 seconds.
Item Details
Time required
Length of the recording session. Varies depending
on the shooting interval and number of shots.
- Scene 1: Up to 1 hour
- Scene 2 or 3: Up to 2 hours
- Custom: Up to 7.5 hours
Playback time
Playback time of the movie created from captured
still images.
● Fast-moving subjects may look distorted in movies.
● When [Exposure] is set to [Fixed], exposure can also be locked
by pressing the [
] button before shooting.
● Sound is not recorded.
● Focus remains constant during shooting, after it is determined for
the rst shot.
● The movie quality is [
] and cannot be changed.
● The time-lapse movie frame rate is automatically set to [
]
for NTSC or [
] for PAL and cannot be changed (=
157).
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
6] tab > [Time-lapse movie settings].
67
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind lter.
● Access the [Sound recording] screen
as described in step 1 of “Adjusting the
Recording Volume” (=
66).
● Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator], and then
press the [
] button.
● Choose [Wind Filter], and then choose
[Off].
Using the Attenuator
Set to [Auto] to reduce audio distortion by automatically activating and
deactivating the attenuator to suit shooting conditions. The attenuator can
also be set to [On] or [Off] manually.
● Access the [Sound recording] screen
as described in step 1 of “Adjusting the
Recording Volume” (=
66).
● Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator], and then
press the [
] button.
● Choose [Attenuator], and then choose
[On] or [Off].
68
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
to [ ] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[
], make sure the function is available in that mode (=
194).
Shooting in Program AE
([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
69 – =
89), and then shoot.
● Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some menu settings (=
34, =
35)
may be automatically adjusted for movie recording.
69
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3.
● As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Deactivating Exposure Simulation
Still Images
Movies
Images are displayed at a brightness simulating the actual brightness as
captured. For this reason, screen brightness is also adjusted in response
to changes in exposure compensation. This feature can be disabled to
keep the screen at a brightness convenient for shooting, unaffected by
exposure compensation.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Expo.
simulation] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose [Disable] (=
35).
Setting Up Shooting from a
Single Screen
The INFO. Quick Control screen provides convenient, single-screen
access to a variety of shooting settings.
1
Access the INFO. Quick Control
screen.
● Press the [ ] button a few times to
display the INFO. Quick Control screen.
2
Choose a setting to congure.
● To view a description, choose an item by
pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● Turn the [
][ ] dials to adjust a
setting.
● The items that are displayed and congurable vary by shooting
mode.
● Some settings are congured on another screen that opens when
you select the setting and press the [
] button. Items labeled
with [
] on the second screen can be congured by pressing
the [
] button. To return to the INFO. Quick Control screen,
press the [
] button.
● You can also access setting screens by touching a setting on the
INFO. Quick Control screen and then touching the setting again.
To return to the INFO. Quick Control screen, touch [
].
● To close a setting description, touch [
] in the upper right of the
description.
70
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
34).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
metering
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Maintains standard exposure of subjects
through automatic adjustments to match the
shooting conditions.
Partial metering
Effective when the background is much
brighter than the subject due to backlighting,
etc. Metering is restricted to within the circular
metering frame in the center of the screen.
Spot metering
This is for metering a specic spot of the
subject or scene. Metering is restricted to within
the circular spot metering frame in the center of
the screen.
Center-weighted
average
Determines the average brightness of light
across the entire image area, calculated by
treating brightness in the central area as more
important.
● With [ ], the exposure is locked at the level determined when
you press the shutter button halfway. With [
], [ ], or [ ],
the exposure is not locked then but determined the moment you
shoot.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
5] tab > [Metering mode].
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
● To unlock AE, press the [
] button again.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
71
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [ISO Auto], and then choose an
option (=
35).
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in
1/3-stop increments.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [AEB]
on the [ 4] tab, and then press the [ ]
button (=
35).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to adjust the setting.
● To cancel AEB, follow steps 1 – 2 to set
the AEB correction value to 0.
● AEB is not available when the ash setting is other than [ ],
when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is on (=
88), or during
continuous or bulb shooting.
● If exposure compensation is already in use (=
69), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function. You can also adjust exposure compensation
by turning the exposure compensation dial in step 2.
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
● To adjust a setting, turn the [
] dial.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
● You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (=
35) >
[
5] tab > [ISO speed] > [ISO Speed].
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
You can limit the ISO speed when ISO speed is set to [AUTO].
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
35).
72
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone
Priority)
Still Images
Movies
Improve gradation in bright image areas to avoid loss of detail in subject
highlights.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 5] tab,
and then choose [D+] (=
35).
● With [D+], ISO speeds lower than 200 are not available. Auto
Lighting Optimizer is also disabled, in this case.
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)
Still Images
Movies
Correct brightness and contrast automatically to avoid images that are too
dark or lack contrast.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
34).
● This feature may increase noise under some shooting conditions.
● When the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and
images become too bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].
● Under settings other than [Disable], images may be bright and
AEB-based exposure compensation may have little effect, even if
you reduce exposure in exposure compensation or ash exposure
compensation settings. For shots at your specied brightness, set
this feature to [Disable].
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
5] tab > [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
73
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Custom White Balance
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
1
Shoot a white object.
● Aim the camera at a sheet of paper or
other plain white subject, so that white
lls the screen.
● Focus manually and shoot (=
81).
2
Choose [Custom WB].
● Choose [Custom WB] on the [ 6] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
3
Load the white data.
● Select your image from step 1, and then
press [ ].
● On the conrmation screen, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
] button to close the
menu.
4
Choose [ ].
● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (=
73) to choose [ ].
Image Colors
Adjusting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
34).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at dusk.
Tungsten light
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
White
uorescent light
For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Custom For manually setting a custom white balance.
Color temp.
For manually setting a white balance color
temperature.
74
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Congure advanced settings.
● To congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and turn
the [ ] or [ ] dial to adjust the
correction level.
● To reset the correction level, press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
● Any correction level you set is retained even if you change the
white balance option in step 1.
● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 5
mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter
density)
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
6] tab > [WB correction].
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
● You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [
] in
step 1.
● Shots in step 1 that are too bright or dark may prevent you from
setting the white balance correctly.
● A message is displayed if you specify an image in step 3 that is
not suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to choose a
different image. Choose [OK] to use that image for loading white
data, but note that it may not produce a suitable white balance.
● If [Unselectable image.] is displayed in step 3, choose [OK] to
clear the message and specify another image.
● If [Set WB to “
”] is displayed in step 3, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen, and then choose [
].
● Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
● The current white balance and related settings are disregarded
when you shoot in step 1.
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the
effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter
or color-compensating lter.
1
Congure the setting.
● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (=
73) to choose the white
balance option.
● Turn the [
] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
75
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Portrait
For smooth skin tones. The image looks softer.
Suited for close-up portraits. To modify skin
tones, adjust [Color tone] (=
76).
Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp
and crisp images. Effective for impressive
landscapes.
Fine Detail
For detailed rendering of ne subject contours
and subtle textures. Makes images slightly more
vivid.
Neutral
For retouching later on a computer. Makes
images subdued, with lower contrast and natural
color tones.
Faithful
For retouching later on a computer. Faithfully
reproduces the actual colors of subjects as
measured under ambient light with a color
temperature of 5200K. Vivid colors are
suppressed for a subdued look.
Monochrome Creates black and white images.
User Def.
Add a new style based on presets such as
[Portrait] or [Landscape] or a Picture Style le,
and then adjust it as needed.
● Default [Auto] settings are used for [ ], [ ], and [ ]
until you add a Picture Style.
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (=
35)
> [
6] tab > [Picture Style].
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature
Still Images
Movies
A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.
● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (=
73) to choose [ ].
● Press the [
] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
● Color temperature can be set at 100 K increments in a range of
2,500 – 10,000 K.
Customizing Colors (Picture Style)
Still Images
Movies
Choose a Picture Style with color settings that express moods or
subjects well. Eight Picture Styles are available, and each can be further
customized.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
34).
Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically
to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid,
especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets
in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable
for most scenes.
76
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Filter effect*
2
Emphasize white clouds in monochrome
images, the green of trees, or other
colors.
N: Normal black-and-white image with
no lter effects.
Ye: The blue sky will look more natural,
and the white clouds will look crisper.
Or: The blue sky will look slightly darker.
The sunset will look more brilliant.
R: The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall
leaves will look crisper and brighter.
G: Skin tones and lips will appear muted.
Green tree leaves will look crisper
and brighter.
Toning effect*
2
Choose from the following monochrome
hues: [N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],
[P:Purple], or [G:Green].
*1 Not available with [ ].
*2 Only available with [
].
● In [Sharpness], [Fineness] and [Threshold] settings are not
applied to movies.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Choose a Picture Style as described
in “Customizing Colors (Picture Style)”
(=
75).
● Press the [
] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then choose an option by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ][ ] dials.
● To undo any changes, press the [
]
button.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
Customizing Picture Styles
Customize these Picture Style settings as needed.
Sharpness
Strength
Adjust the level of edge enhancement.
Choose lower values to soften (blur)
subjects, or higher values to sharpen
them.
Fineness
Indicates the edge thinness that
enhancement applies to. Choose lower
values for more enhanced details.
Threshold
Contrast threshold between edges
and surrounding image areas, which
determines edge enhancement. Choose
lower values to enhance edges that do not
stand out much from surrounding areas.
Note that with lower values, noise may
also be emphasized.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast. Choose lower values
to decrease the contrast, or higher values
to increase it.
Saturation*
1
Adjust the intensity of colors. Choose
lower values to make colors faded, or
higher values to make them deeper.
Color tone*
1
Adjust skin color tone. Choose lower
values to produce redder hues, or higher
values to produce yellower hues.
77
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Focusing
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Movies
Choose a method of auto focusing (AF) for the subject and scene you are
shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
34).
● Focusing may take longer or be incorrect when subjects are dark
or lack contrast, in very bright conditions, or with some EF or
EF-S lenses. For lens details, visit the Canon website.
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (=
35)
> [
3] tab > [AF method].
● [Filter effect] results are more noticeable with higher [Contrast]
values.
Saving Customized Picture Styles
Save presets (such as [ ] or [ ]) that you have customized as new
styles. You can create several Picture Styles with different settings for
parameters such as sharpness or contrast.
1
Select a user-dened style number.
● Choose [ ], [ ], or [ ] as
described in “Customizing Colors (Picture
Style)” (=
75).
2
Select a style to modify.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to choose the Picture
Style that serves as the basis.
3
Customize the style.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item to modify, and then customize it,
either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ][ ] dials.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
● You can also choose styles in step 2 that you have added to the
camera using EOS Utility (=
176).
● Download software instruction manuals from the Canon website
as needed. For downloading instructions, see “Software
Instruction Manual” (=
176).
78
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● An orange frame is displayed with [
] if the camera cannot focus
on subjects when you press the shutter button halfway.
● Focusing is not possible on faces detected at the edge of the
screen (which are displayed with gray frames), even when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Smooth Zone AF
● The camera focuses within your designated area. Effective when the
subject is hard to capture with + Tracking or 1-point AF, because
you can specify where to focus. The camera will focus within the white
frame displayed. You can move the white frame by dragging it or
touching the screen.
● When you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames
are displayed around positions in focus within the white frame.
● An orange frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
on subjects when you press the shutter button halfway.
●
The frame size varies depending on IS Mode and Auto Level
settings.
●
Blue frames are displayed around positions in focus when you
select
MENU (=
35)
> [ 3] tab > [AF operation] > [Servo AF].
1-point AF
● The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
focusing.
● Frames turn green after you press the shutter button halfway and the
camera focuses.
● Move the frame as needed (=
79). To compose shots with
subjects on the edge or in a corner without moving the frame, rst
aim the camera to bring the subject into an AF frame, and then
hold the shutter button halfway down. Keep the shutter button
halfway down as you recompose the shot, and then press the
shutter button all the way down (Focus Lock).
● To magnify the position of the AF frame, follow steps 2 – 4 in
“Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” (=
81).
Note that Touch
Shutter is not available at this time.
● To reduce the frame size, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 3] tab
> [AF Frame Size] > [Small].
Note that Servo AF (
=
80
) and
Continuous AF (
=
80
) are not available at this time.
+Tracking
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the face of the main subject as determined by the camera. You
can also choose subjects yourself (=
79).
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● Frames turn green after you press the shutter button halfway and the
camera focuses.
● When no faces are detected, pressing the shutter button halfway
displays green frames around other areas in focus.
79
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● You can also switch faces and move the AF frame, by pressing
the [
] button.
- To move the frame when AF method is set to [
], after
pressing the [
] button, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Press the [
] button to return to the shooting screen. To center
the frame again, on the shooting screen or frame adjustment
screen, hold down the [
] button for at least two seconds.
- When the AF method is set to [
], press the [ ]
button to display [Face Select : On]. A face frame [
] is
displayed around the face detected as the main subject. Press
the [
] button again to switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face. Once you cycle through all detected faces, [Face
Select : Off] is displayed and Face Select is canceled.
● To keep the frame in the same position (where you touched)
after shooting when [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable] (=
46),
choose MENU (=
35) > [ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [AF
frame pos’n] > [Touch point].
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
● With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
● The focus is now locked, and [
] is
displayed.
● To unlock the focus, release the shutter
button and press the [
] button again. In
this case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after the camera focuses on your selected subject,
person’s face, or location shown on the screen.
1
Choose a subject, a person’s face,
or a location to focus on.
● Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
● When the AF method is set to [
],
an AF frame is displayed where you
touched.
● When the AF method is set to [
],
[ ] is displayed once a face is detected,
and focus is maintained even if the
subject moves. To cancel Touch AF, touch
[ ].
2
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] is displayed in
green.
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● If the camera shoots when you touch the screen, choose MENU
(=
35) > [ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter], and then set [Touch
Shutter] to [Disable].
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
80
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Exposure is not locked in Servo AF mode when you press the
shutter button halfway but is determined the moment you shoot,
regardless of the metering mode (=
70) setting.
● Continuous shooting (=
46) with auto focus is possible by
specifying Servo AF. Note that continuous shooting is slower at
this time. Also note that focus may be lost if you zoom in or out
during continuous shooting.
● Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the
subject’s speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct
focus.
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (=
35)
> [
3] tab > [AF operation].
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
then choose [Off] (=
35).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly. However, this may delay focusing.
● Choosing MENU (=
35) > [ 3] tab > [AF Frame Size] >
[Small] will restrict the mode to [Off].
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ONE
SHOT] in the menu, and then choose
[SERVO] (=
34).
2
Focus.
● The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
● The camera may not be able to shoot while focusing, even if you
press the shutter button all the way down. Keep holding down the
shutter button as you follow the subject.
● An orange AF frame is displayed when the camera cannot focus
on subjects.
● Using the self-timer (=
44) will restrict the AF mode to [ONE
SHOT].
● Choosing MENU (=
35) > [ 3] tab > [AF Frame Size] >
[Small] will restrict the mode to [ONE SHOT].
81
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. To make
focusing easier, magnify the display.
1
Choose [ ].
● EF-M lenses: Press the [ ] button.
● Other lenses: Turn off the camera, set
the lens switch to [MF], and then turn the
camera on again.
● [MF] is displayed.
2
Display the magnifying frame.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The magnifying frame is displayed,
centered on the screen.
3
Select the area to magnify.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move
the frame to an area to magnify.
● To center the frame again, press the
[
] button.
4
Activate magnication.
● Turn the [ ] dial to switch the
magnication between 1x (no
magnication), 5x, and 10x.
Fine-Tuning the Focus
Still Images
Movies
Fine-tune autofocusing with an EF-M lens attached by turning the focusing
ring.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Focus
mode] on the [ 3] tab, and then choose
[AF+MF] (=
35).
2
Focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
● Turn the focusing ring on the lens to
adjust the focus.
● [MF] blinks on the screen.
● To cancel focusing, release the shutter
button.
4
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● Cannot be used with Servo AF (=
80).
● Not available with lenses other than EF-M lenses.
82
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Flash” (=
213).
1
Raise the ash.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose a ash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Press the [
] button to raise the ash,
then congure the setting.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur. Vignetting or dark image
areas may also occur, if the ash res, depending on the lens.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or ISO speed for ash shots to reduce
washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. Thus,
shutter speeds and ISO speeds displayed when you press the
shutter button halfway may not match the settings in ash shots.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Flash ring].
5
Focus.
● While looking at the magnied image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
6
Shoot.
● You can also move the magnifying frame in step 3 by dragging it.
● By touching [
] in the lower right, you can also adjust the
magnication ratio and drag to move the area magnied.
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then set [Peaking] to [On] (=
35).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (=
35).
● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
83
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (=
69), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
● Raise the ash, press the [
] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
● The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for ash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (=
35) and
choosing [
5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Safety FE] > [Disable].
● You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (=
35) and choosing [ 5] tab > [Flash
Control] > [Built-in ash settings] > [
exp. comp.].
● You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=
35) as
follows.
- Press and hold the [
] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
● You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=
35) by
pressing the [
] button and touching [ ].
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case,
also disable image stabilization (=
86).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
84
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [Built-in ash settings].
● Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (=
35).
1st curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.
● [1st curtain] is used whenever the shutter speed is 1/100 or faster,
even if you select [2nd curtain].
Changing the Flash Metering Mode
Still Images
Movies
[Evaluative] ash metering, which enables standard ash exposure, can
be changed to average ash metering across the metering area, as when
using an externally metered ash.
● Press the [
] button and choose
[Flash Control] on the [ 5] tab. Choose
[E-TTL II meter.] and then [Average].
● When using [Average], adjust ash exposure compensation to
suit the shooting conditions.
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (=
70), you can lock the exposure for ash
shots.
1
Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
82).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
● The ash res, and when [
] is
displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
● To unlock FE, press the [
] button again.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
● FE: Flash Exposure
● The metering range is shown by a circle in the center of the
screen when FE is locked.
● [
] blinks when standard exposure is not possible (even if the
ash res in step 2). Follow step 2 when subjects are within range
for ash shots.
85
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Other Settings
Switching to Other Functions to Adjust with the
Quick Control Dial
Still Images
Movies
You can switch between functions that can be adjusted with the [ ] dial
by pressing the [ ] button repeatedly.
1
Choose a function.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The icon (1) of the function adjustable
with the [
] dial is displayed.
2
Set the desired item.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the desired
item while the function icon is displayed.
● After you set the desired item, the
camera will revert to the default function
adjusted with the Quick Control Dial.
● The camera will revert to the default function adjusted with the
[
] button after some time, even if no items are set.
Resetting Flash Settings
Still Images
Movies
Reset [Built-in ash settings] to the default values.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [Clear settings].
● Choose [Clear built-in ash set.], press
the [
] button, choose [OK] on the next
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
86
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Correcting Camera Shake when Shooting Movies
Still Images
Movies
In-camera image stabilization corrects camera shake when you shoot
movies. Camera shake can be corrected even without a lens that is
equipped with image stabilization.
Even more effective correction is possible by using a lens that supports
Combination IS, which combines lens image stabilization with in-camera
Digital IS.
For details on lenses compatible with Combination IS, visit the Canon
website.
● Follow step 1 in “Changing the IS Mode
Settings” (=
86) to access the [IS
Settings] screen.
● Choose [Digital IS], and then choose the
desired option (=
35).
Enable
Corrects camera shake when
shooting movies. The image
display area narrows and
subjects are slightly enlarged.
(When using
lens supporting
Combination IS)
Enhanced
Corrects strong camera shake
when shooting movies. Subjects
are further enlarged.
(When using
lens supporting
Combination IS)
Disable
–
● Try taking some test shots rst to check the effect with the lens
you are using.
● [Enhanced] is only available in [
] and [ ] modes.
● When you set [Digital IS] to [Enable] or [Enhanced],
[
Auto level] is set to [Disable] and cannot be changed.
● Functions you can switch to by pressing the [ ] button can
be modied as described in “Assigning Functions to the Quick
Control Dial” (=
98).
● This function is not available in [
] or [ ] modes.
● Functions available while shooting movies in [
] mode are
[
], [ ], and [ ].
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Congure image stabilization via the camera menu when using an EF-M
lens with image stabilization.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
35).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the
desired option (=
35).
Continuous
Corrects camera movement or camera shake using
built-in image stabilization performed by the lens.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
● [IS Mode] is not displayed for lenses other than EF-M lenses. Use
the image stabilization switch on the lens instead (=
26).
● Lenses with built-in image stabilization are named with “IS”. IS
stands for Image Stabilizer.
87
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● The effect of peripheral illumination correction is slightly less than
that of maximum correction in Digital Photo Professional.
● The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of peripheral
illumination correction will be.
● [Diffraction] corrects loss of sharpness not only from diffraction but
also from the low-pass lter and other factors. Thus, correction is
also effective for exposures with the aperture wide open.
● Download software instruction manuals from the Canon website
as needed. For downloading instructions, see “Software
Instruction Manual” (=
176).
Lens Correction Data
Lens correction data for lenses compatible with this feature is registered
(stored) on the camera. Set [Peripheral illumin.] and [Chromatic
aberration] to [Enable] for automatic correction.
Using EOS Utility, you can check which lenses have correction data
registered on the camera. You can also register correction data for lenses
that have not been registered yet. For details, refer to the EOS Utility
instruction manual (=
176).
* Note that there is no need to register information for EF-M lenses, or for EF lenses
that incorporate their own correction data.
● Existing JPEG images cannot be corrected.
● Effects of peripheral illumination correction and chromatic
aberration correction are not displayed when shooting with a
magnied view. Similarly, the effect of diffraction correction is not
displayed at the time of shooting.
● The amount of correction (except diffraction correction) is less for
lenses that do not provide distance information.
Correcting Lens Aberrations
Still Images
Movies
Correct vignetting and subject color fringing due to lens characteristics, or
lack of image sharpness due to aperture.
Note that when [Correction data not available] is displayed on the setting
screen, correction data has not been added to the camera. See “Lens
Correction Data” (=
87) for details on adding correction data.
1
Choose [Lens aberration
correction].
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Lens
aberration correction] on the [ 4] tab,
and then choose an item (=
35).
2
Conrm that correction data is
available.
● Make sure [Correction data available] is
displayed under the lens name.
3
Apply correction.
● Choose an item and press the [ ] button
to apply the setting (=
35).
● Noise may occur around the edges of images shot under some
conditions if you set [Peripheral illumin.] to [Enable].
● When setting [Diffraction] to [Enable], keep the following points
in mind.
- When correcting lens aberration, this feature may also make
noise more noticeable, under some shooting conditions.
- The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction
will be.
- Correction is not applied to movies.
88
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Shoot.
● Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all the
way down, the camera will take four shots
and combine them.
● Unexpected results may occur if images are quite misaligned
(from camera shake, for example). Mount the camera on a tripod
or take other measures to keep it still, if possible.
● If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become
dark.
● Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the
image periphery.
● Not available with AEB or [Long exp. noise reduction], or when
shooting RAW images or bulb exposures. Setting up these
features will prevent you from using [Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
● Flash shooting is not possible.
● Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. You cannot take another shot until processing is
nished.
● Effects of lens aberration correction vary by lens and shooting
conditions. With some lenses and under some shooting
conditions, effects may be less noticeable.
● If effects of correction are hard to see, magnify the image and
check again.
● Results of shooting without registering correction data for the lens
on the camera are the same as shooting with [Peripheral illumin.]
and [Chromatic aberration] set to [Disable].
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
Still Images
Movies
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
● Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO speed NR] on the [ 6] tab, and
then choose the desired option (=
35).
Using Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Automatically combine four images captured at once for noise reduction
superior to the [High] option in [High ISO speed NR].
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow the steps in “Changing the Noise
Reduction Level” (=
88) to choose
[ ].
89
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Reducing Noise at Slow Shutter Speeds
Still Images
Movies
Reduce noise from long exposures at shutter speeds of one second or
slower.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Long
exp. noise reduction] on the [ 6] tab,
and then choose an option (=
35).
OFF Disables noise reduction for long exposures.
AUTO
Applies noise reduction if the noise that tends to occur in
long exposures at shutter speeds of one second or slower is
detected.
ON
Always applies noise reduction at shutter speeds of one second
or slower.
● There may be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
reduces noise in images.
● Images shot at speeds of ISO 1600 or higher may be grainier with
this option set to [ON] than at [OFF] or [AUTO].
90
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for
your shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
mode.
Specic Shutter Speeds
([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (=
213).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
● There may be a delay before you can shoot again when [Long
exp. noise reduction] is set to [ON] or [AUTO] and the shutter
speed is 1 second or slower, because images are processed to
remove noise.
● We recommend deactivating image stabilization when shooting at
slow shutter speeds on a tripod (=
86).
● Maximum shutter speed with the ash is 1/200 second. If you
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the
speed to 1/200 second before shooting.
● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the standard exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (=
96).
● [ ]: Time value
91
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Depth-of-Field Preview
The aperture changes only at the moment you shoot, and it remains open
at other times. For this reason, the depth of eld shown on the screen
looks narrow, or shallow. To check the area in focus, assign [ ] (depth-of-
eld preview) to a button (=
97) and press it.
Specic Aperture Values
([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
Available aperture values vary by lens.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the standard exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (=
96).
● Maximum shutter speed with the ash is 1/200 second. To avoid
exceeding 1/200 second in ash shots, the camera may adjust
the aperture value.
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
92
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● When the ISO speed is xed, screen brightness may change
depending on your specied shutter speed and aperture value.
However, screen brightness remains the same when the ash is
up and the mode is set to [
].
● Exposure may not be as expected when the ISO speed is set to
[AUTO], because the ISO speed is adjusted to ensure standard
exposure relative to your specied shutter speed and aperture
value.
● Image brightness may be affected by the Auto Lighting Optimizer
(=
72). To keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer disabled in [ ]
mode, press the [
] button on the Auto Lighting Optimizer
setting screen to add a [
] mark to [Disable during man expo].
● [ ]: Manual
● Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specied
metering method (=
70).
● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [
] dial
adjusts the shutter speed and turning the [
] dial adjusts the
aperture value (=
98).
● The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
- Press the [
] button to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness
changes accordingly.
● You can also adjust the setting items on the bottom of the screen
by touching an item to select it and then either touching/dragging
the bar or touching [
][ ].
Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain your desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (=
213). Available
aperture values vary by lens.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed (1).
● Turn the [
] dial to set the aperture
value (2).
● Press the [
] button and turn the [ ] dial
to set the ISO speed (3).
● When the ISO speed is xed, an
exposure level mark (5) based on
your specied values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (4). The
exposure level mark is shown as [
] or
[ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
● The ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specied shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
93
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ][ ][ ] modes.
1
Set the ash mode to [Manual ash].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Flash Control] on the [ 5] tab. In
[Built-in ash settings], set [Flash Mode]
to [Manual ash] (=
35).
2
Congure the setting.
● Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the ash level, and then press the [ ]
button.
● Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium,
[ ]: Maximum
● You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (=
35)
and choosing [
5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Built-in ash settings]
> [
ash output].
● You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=
35) as
follows.
- Press and hold the [
] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
● You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=
35) by
pressing the [
] button and touching [ ].
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
1
Specify bulb exposure.
● Set the shutter speed to [BULB],
following steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode)”
(=
92).
2
Shoot.
● Shots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
stabilization (=
86).
● Images from bulb exposures may have more noise and look
grainy. Noise can be reduced by setting [Long exp. noise
reduction] to [AUTO] or [ON] (=
89).
● You can also use a Remote Controller (sold separately) for bulb
exposures (=
171).
● When [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be
careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
94
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● When the ISO speed is xed, an exposure level mark based on
your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [
] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
● You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing
the shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be
obtained with your specied shutter speed and aperture value,
the exposure level mark moves, indicating the difference from
standard exposure. The exposure level mark is shown as [
] or
[
] when the difference from standard exposure exceeds 3 stops.
● You can also adjust the setting items on the bottom of the screen
by touching an item to select it and then either touching/dragging
the bar or touching [
][ ].
● Focus can be locked during recording by touching [
]. [ ] is
then displayed.
Recording Movies at Specic
Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed. For
details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (=
213). Available
aperture values vary by lens.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
34).
2
Congure the settings.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
● Turn the [
] dial to set the aperture
value.
● Press the [
] button and turn the [ ] dial
to set the ISO speed.
● Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when
recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
● Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
95
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Customizing the Information Displayed
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (=
95) to choose
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [ ]
mark.
● To see an example of display, press the
[
] button to return to the [Screen
info/ toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] screen.
● For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab > [Shooting
information display] > [Grid display].
● The following settings are available by choosing [
1] tab >
[Shooting information display] > [Histogram].
- Switch from a brightness histogram to an RGB histogram.
- Reduce the size of the histogram displayed.
Conguring Touch & Drag AF
Still Images
Movies
With Touch & Drag AF, you can move the AF frame by touching or
dragging the screen while looking through the viewnder.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Choose [Touch & drag AF settings] on the
[ 2] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(=
35).
Customizing Controls and
Display
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button
on the shooting screen. You can also customize what information is
displayed.
1
Access the setting screen.
● On the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] in [Shooting information display],
and then press the [ ] button (=
35).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the [ ]
button again will add the [ ] mark, which
indicates that it is selected for display.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
● Display cannot be congured with all [
] marks cleared, or with
only [INFO. Quick Control] selected.
96
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Restricting the Area of the Screen Available for Touch
and Drag Operations
● Choose [Active touch area] in step 1 of
“Conguring Touch & Drag AF” (=
95).
● Choose the area that will be available for
this feature.
Conguring Custom Functions
Congure custom functions on the [ 1] tab of the menu (=
35) to
customize how the camera works to suit your shooting preferences. You
can also assign commonly used functions to dials and buttons.
1
Choose the type of function to
customize.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
the [ 1] tab (=
35).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose a type of function
([Exposure] or [Others]), and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the function.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to choose a function, and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
● When nished, press the [
] button to
return to the previous screen.
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Touch & drag AF], select
[Enable], and then press the [ ] button.
● This function is not available in the following cases.
- When the screen is open 180°
- When MENU (=
35) > [ 3] tab > [Touch Operation] is set to
[Disable]
● AF frames may not be displayed correctly if you switch to
viewnder display while touching the screen. In this case, lift your
nger and touch the screen again.
● You can also change Touch and Drag AF settings by pressing the
[
] button.
Changing the Settings of Touch and Drag Operations
● Choose [Pos’n method] in step 1 of
“Conguring Touch & Drag AF” (=
95)
and choose the desired option.
Absolute
The AF frame moves to the touched or dragged position on
the screen.
Relative
The AF frame moves in the direction you drag, by an
amount corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter
where you touch the screen.
97
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Assigning Functions to Buttons and Dials
Reassign functions of the shutter button, [ ] button, or [ ], [ ], or
[ ] dials, or assign common functions to the [ ] button, movie
button, or other buttons.
1
Access the screen for assigning
functions.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Conguring
Custom Functions” (=
96) and choose
[Custom Controls] in [Others].
2
Assign the function.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to choose the dial or
button to assign, and then press the [ ]
button.
● When assigning the shutter button or [
]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a function.
● When assigning the [
][ ][ ]
dials, choose [Dials], and then choose a
function.
● For details on assigning the [
] dial,
see “Assigning Functions to the Quick
Control Dial” (=
98).
● When assigning the [
], movie, Touch
& Drag AF switching, [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[ ] button, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ][ ] dials to choose a
function.
● When nished, press the [
] button to
return to the previous screen.
Type of
Function
Function Description
Exposure
ISO
expansion
Set to [1:Enable] for the option of setting
the ISO speed to [H] in [
] mode. [H]
corresponds to ISO 12800.
Safety shift
Set to [1:Enable] for automatic adjustment
of the shutter speed and aperture value
to bring the exposure level closer to
standard exposure if standard exposure
would not be available otherwise under
your specied shutter speed or aperture
value in [
] or [ ] mode.
Others
Dial direction
during Tv/Av
Set to [1:Reverse direction] to reverse
the direction of setting the shutter speed
or aperture value in [
], [ ], or [ ]
mode with the [ ], [ ], or [ ] dial.
Custom
Controls
Assign commonly used functions to dials
and buttons (=
97).
Release
shutter w/o
lens
Set to [1:Enable] to enable shooting
without a lens attached, either by
pressing the shutter button or movie
button.
Retract lens
on power off
Specify whether the lens should be
retracted automatically when you turn the
camera off.
● To cancel all changes on the [ 1] tab and restore defaults,
choose [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] on the screen in step 1,
choose [OK] (either press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and press the [
] button.
● [H] is not available when [Highlight tone priority] is set to [D+]
(=
72), even with [ISO expansion] set to [1:Enable].
● Safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
● Automatic lens retraction when powered off is available for lenses
that support this feature.
98
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● To restore the default functions to the [ ], movie, Touch &
Drag AF switching, [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] buttons, choose
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
● If you prefer not to assign any functions to the button, choose [
].
● Icons labeled with [
] when buttons are assigned indicate that
the function is not available under current function conditions.
● To specify whether to capture images in both JPEG and RAW
format simultaneously each time a button is pressed, assign [
].
● To preview the depth of eld with your specied aperture value as
you hold down a button, assign [
].
● To deactivate screen display when a button is pressed, assign [
].
Assigning Functions to the Quick Control Dial
Add or change the order of [ ] dial functions that can be adjusted by
pressing the [ ] button.
1
Access the screen for assigning
functions.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Assigning
Functions to Buttons and Dials” (=
97)
and choose [Set Func.].
2
Assign the function.
● Choose [Register], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
shooting mode.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a function to add, and then
press the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To cancel saving, press the [
] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
● Press the [
] button.
Shutter button or
[ ] button
[AF/AE lock]
Enable exposure lock by pressing
the [
] button, after focusing by
pressing the shutter button halfway.
[AE lock/AF]
Enable exposure lock by pressing
the shutter button halfway, and
focusing by pressing the [
] button.
[AF/AF lock,
no AE lock]
Enable focus lock by pressing the
[
] button.
[AE/AF, no
AE lock]
Enable exposure compensation by
pressing the shutter button halfway,
and focusing by pressing the [
]
button.
[
][ ] dials
By assigning [Av/Tv], in [ ] mode you can set
aperture value with the [ ] dial and shutter
speed with the [ ] dial.
[
]
([ ] button)
Customize the available functions and their order by
pressing the [
] button in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[ ] modes.
[
] button
Press the button to activate the assigned function.
Movie button
Touch & Drag AF
switching button
[
] ([ ] button)
[
] ([ ] button)
[
] ([ ] button)
[
] ([ ] button)
99
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an icon, and then press
the [ ] button to label icons you want to
display in the Quick Set menu with [ ].
● Selected items (labeled with a [
]) will
be included in display.
● Items without a [
] can be congured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
● The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[
] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
● You can also choose icons on the screen in step 2 by touching
them.
3
Rearrange functions, as needed.
● Choose [Sort] and press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
shooting mode.
● Choose a function to move (either press
the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Default shooting settings are used for
functions labeled [Normal].
● Press the [
] button.
● On the [Register] screen for saving or clearing items, you can also
touch items to select them.
● On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Still Images Movies
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Quick
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (=
35).
100
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Rearranging Menu Items
1
Access the setting screen.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (=
99),
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an icon to move, and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the new position, and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● You can also rearrange icons by dragging them.
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ] or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you
switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings)
can be retained this way.
Settings That Can Be Saved
● Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])
● Items set in [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (=
69 – =
92)
● Shooting menu settings
● My Menu settings (=
101)
1
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2
Access the screen for assigning
functions.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)] on the
[ 4] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Save the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Register settings], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a custom shooting mode to
assign, and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK] after the conrmation
message, and then press the [ ] button.
● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ]
or [
], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
● To reset saved settings to their defaults, choose [Clear settings]
on the screen in step 3, press the [
] button, and then choose
the custom shooting mode. On the conrmation screen displayed
next, choose [OK] and press the [
] button.
● To automatically update your saved settings with any changes to
settings that you make while shooting in [
] or [ ] mode, set
[Auto update set.] to [Enable] on the screen in step 3.
101
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Add
My Menu tab] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
35).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Choose [Set up MY MENU1] on the [
1]
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select item to register],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
● [
] is displayed.
● To cancel saving, press the [
] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
● Press the [
] button.
3
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort registered items], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
] button.
● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
● You can add up to [ 5] by repeating this process from step 1.
● Choosing [Delete all items on tab] on the screen in step 2 will
delete all items added to the tab.
● On the [Select item to register] screen for saving or clearing
items, you can also touch items to select them.
● On the [Sort registered items] screen, you can also drag items to
change the display order.
102
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items
1
Choose an item.
● Choose [Delete all My Menu tabs] or
[Delete all items] on the screen in step
1 of “Saving Commonly Used Shooting
Menu Items (My Menu)” (=
101).
2
Delete the item.
● Choosing [Delete all My Menu tabs] will
delete all My Menu tabs and restore the
default [ ] tab.
● Choosing [Delete all items] will delete all
items added to tabs [
1] to [ 5].
Customizing My Menu Tab Display
Specify which screen is displayed when the [ ] button is pressed in
Shooting mode.
● On the screen in step 1 of “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (=
101), choose [Menu
display], and then choose an item as
desired.
Normal display
Display the most recent menu, as
shown for your previous operation.
Display from My Menu tab
Start display from [
] tab screens.
Display only My Menu tab
Restrict display to [
] tab screens.
Renaming My Menu Tabs
1
Choose [Rename tab].
● Following step 2 in “Saving Commonly
Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu)”
(=
101), choose [Rename tab] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Change the tab name.
● Use the keyboard displayed to enter the
new tab name (=
37).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
Deleting a My Menu Tab
1
Choose [Delete tab].
● Following step 2 in “Saving Commonly
Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu)”
(=
101), choose [Delete tab] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Delete the item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
103
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
] button to
enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
● Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to browse through images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
104
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Touch-Screen Operations
● To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
● To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
● You can also browse through images in
Scroll Display mode by dragging left or
right.
● Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
● To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
● To start movie playback, touch [
] in step
3 of “Viewing” (=
103).
● To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
● To stop movie playback, touch the
screen. The screen shown here is
displayed, and the camera is ready for
your next operation.
- Touch [
] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume.
- To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
- To resume playback, touch [
].
- Touch [
] to return to the screen in
step 2 of “Viewing” (=
103).
3
Play movies.
● To start playback, press the [ ] button,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
● To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
● To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
● After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● White lines indicating the aspect ratio are displayed when you
view RAW images. These lines are shown on the top and bottom
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
] and on the left and right
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
] or [ ].
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 4] tab
> [Scroll Display] > [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 5] tab > [Resume] > [Last
shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(=
35) and choose your desired effect on the [ 4] tab >
[Transition Effect].
105
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Show overexposed highlights in images as blinking areas.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Highlight alert] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [Enable].
AF Point Display
Still Images
Movies
Check the AF frame that was in focus for a shot by displaying it outlined
in red.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF
point disp.] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [Enable].
Grid Display
Still Images
Movies
Display a grid.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Playback grid] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
Switching Display Modes
Press the [ ] button in Playback mode to switch from “no info
display” to “info display 1” (basic info) to “info display 2” (details).
● Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed
Customize the information shown on each screen. For details on the
information available, see “During Playback” (=
192).
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Playback information display] on the
[ 5] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose information to display.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [ ]
mark.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
● To display [
] mode setting details, add a [ ] mark to [Info
display 2]. This setting information, followed by [Info display 2],
will be displayed when you press the [
] button.
106
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (=
41) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
● Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [ ] icon.
● Choose a still image labeled with
[
] and press the [ ] button.
2
Play the movie.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
34).
● The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(=
105).
● You can also play digest movies by touching [ ] on the
screen in step 1 and touching [
] on the screen in step 2.
Brightness Histogram
Still Images
Movies
● Information displays 2 – 8 include a graph
on the top called a brightness histogram,
which shows the distribution of brightness
in images. The horizontal axis represents
the degree of brightness, and the vertical
axis, how much of the image is at each
level of brightness. Viewing the histogram
is a way to check exposure.
RGB Histogram
Still Images
Movies
● Information display 3 includes an RGB
histogram, showing the distribution
of reds, greens, and blues in images.
The horizontal axis represents R, G,
or B brightness, and the vertical axis,
how much of the image is at that level
of brightness. Viewing this histogram
enables you to check image color
characteristics.
● An RGB histogram can also be shown at the top of information
displays 2 – 8. Choose one of the information display options
from 2 to 8 in [Playback information display] on tab [
5], press
the [
] button, choose [RGB] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [
] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Note
that information display 3 will show a brightness histogram on the
bottom of the screen.
● The histogram can also be accessed while shooting (=
191).
107
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
● Turn the [ ] dial clockwise to display
images in an index. To view more images
at once, turn the dial again.
● To view fewer images at once, turn the
[
] dial counterclockwise. Fewer
images are shown each time you turn
the dial.
2
Choose an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
● Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
● To use the [ ] and [ ] buttons just as you would use the
[
] dial in step 1, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 5] tab >
[
resize] > [Enable].
● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(=
35) > [ 4] tab > [Index Effect] > [Off].
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1
Choose a movie.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose a date (=
35).
2
Play the movie.
● Press the [ ] button to start playback.
108
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(=
112) or delete (=
114) these images all at once.
Rating
Displays images you have rated (=
117).
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[
] mode (=
41).
1
Choose the rst condition.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button.
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
condition.
● When [
] is selected, you can view
only images matching this condition by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [ ]
button and go to step 3.
2
Choose the second condition and
view the ltered images.
● When you have selected [ ], [ ], or [ ]
as the rst condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
● To switch to ltered image display, press
the [
] button and go to step 3.
Touch-Screen Operations
● Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
● To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
● Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
● To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your ngers apart.
● Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Double-Touch Magnication
● Quickly touch the screen twice to magnify
the image about 3x.
● To return to single-image display from
magnied display, quickly touch the
screen twice.
109
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Use the main dial to nd and jump between desired images quickly by
ltering image display according to your specied conditions.
Displays images you have rated (=
117).
Jumps to the rst image in each group of images
that were shot on the same date.
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1
Choose a condition.
● Choose a condition (or jump method)
in single-image display by turning the
[ ] dial and then pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2
View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
● Turn the [ ] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
● Use [ ] to jump between images with any rating.
● Turning the [
] dial when browsing images in index display
will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump
method chosen in single-image display.
● You can also set the condition (or jump method) by choosing
MENU (=
35) > [ 5] tab > [Image jump w/ ].
3
View the ltered images.
● Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
● To cancel ltered display, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (=
107), “Magnifying
Images” (=
110), and “Viewing Slideshows” (=
111). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (=
112) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(=
115), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (=
181), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (=
183).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (=
118 –
=
121), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
● The same operations are available by pressing the [
]
button and choosing [
2] tab > [Image Search].
● You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
1 and 2.
110
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
● Each time you turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise, images are magnied,
up to about 10x.
● The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
● To reduce image display, turn the [
]
dial clockwise.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
● To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. Press the [ ]
button to move to the AF frame that was
in focus at the time of shooting.
● To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [
] dial.
Touch-Screen Operations
● You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial
to Jump between Images” (=
109) by
dragging left or right with two ngers.
111
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab
(=
35).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
● Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (=
31) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [
][ ] buttons down.
● You can congure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
choosing [Set up] and pressing the [
] button (=
35).
● You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
● In [Magnify (approx.)] on tab [
5], you can set the magnication
in single-image display when the [
] dial is turned
counterclockwise. Set to [Reuse last magnication] to enlarge
to the magnication used last time, before you pressed the
[
] button. Set to [Actual size (from selected pt)] for display
with image pixels shown approximately full size, centered on the
AF frame in focus.
● To use the [
] and [ ] buttons just as you would use the
[
] dial in step 1, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 5] tab >
[
resize] > [Enable].
Touch-Screen Operations
● Spread your ngers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
● You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
● To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
● Pinch in to zoom out.
● Touch [
] to restore single-image
display.
112
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(=
112), choose [Select] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
● You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching
[
].
● You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (=
114).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial). [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel protection, choose [
]. [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (=
156).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (=
35).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose an option as desired (=
35).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
113
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can also choose the rst or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
● You can also display the screen for choosing the rst or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
● You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(=
112), choose [Protect All Images]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(=
112), choose [Select Range] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
114
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (=
112) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[
] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
choosing [Erase
], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase +JPEG].
● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once” (=
113), and then complete step 2.
115
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Choose an image.
● Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(=
112), [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
115), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
113) to specify images.
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (=
112) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab
(=
35).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
115), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
116
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
34).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], which rotates
the image 90° in the specied direction.
Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(=
117).
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (=
35).
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
115), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
117
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Rating Images (Rating)
Still Images
Movies
Organize images by rating them on a scale of 1 – 5 ([ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ]). By viewing only images with a specied rating, you can
restrict the following operations to all images with that rating.
● “Viewing” (=
103), “Viewing Slideshows” (=
111), “Protecting
Images” (=
112), “Erasing Images” (=
114), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (=
181), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(=
183)
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then rate the image (=
34).
● To remove ratings, repeat this process
but choose [
], and then press the [ ]
button.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rating].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rating] on the [ 1] tab (=
35).
2
Choose an image and rate it.
● Choose an image (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
rating.
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
● Press the [
] button to rotate the image
90° clockwise. Press it again to rotate it
90° counterclockwise, and press it a third
time to restore the original orientation.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate
images or touch [
] to return to the menu screen.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ 4] tab, and then choose
[Off] (=
35).
● Images cannot be rotated (=
116) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
118
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (=
118 – =
121) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
● When [ ] is shown on the screen, you can touch [ ]
instead of pressing the [
] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown on the screen, you can touch [ ]
instead of pressing the [
] button, if you prefer.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose an image size.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
(=
34).
● Press the [
] button.
2
Save the new image.
● After [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Ratings are not applied if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the
camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
● You can also rate images by touching [ ][ ] on the bottom of
the screen in step 2.
119
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(=
118).
● Press the [
] button and follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (=
118).
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(=
34).
2
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
● To resize the frame, turn the [ ] dial.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To change the frame orientation, turn the
[
] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
● To change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [
] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
between aspect ratios ([ ], [ ],
[ ], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
3
Preview the cropped image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
● To switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[
] button repeatedly.
3
Review the new image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Processed img.], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] (=
47).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
● Choosing [Original image] in step 3 will display the original image.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Resize].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ 3] tab (=
35).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
120
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Applying Filter Effects
Apply effects equivalent to shooting in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[ ] modes to images and save them as separate images.
1
Choose an effect.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the effect
(=
34).
● Press the [
] button.
2
Adjust the effect as needed.
● [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to adjust contrast.
● [
]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to adjust defocusing.
● [
] or [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to adjust the level of the
effect.
● [
]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to adjust color saturation.
● [
]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to adjust color tone.
● [
]: Press the [ ] button to resize
the frame, and press the [ ][ ] buttons
to move it.
3
Save as a new image and review.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(=
118).
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(=
118).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
● Cropped images cannot be resized or have Creative lters
applied.
● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
● While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
● Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
]
button, choosing [
3] tab > [Cropping], pressing the [ ] button,
choosing an image, and pressing the [
] button again.
● You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (=
111) on the
screen.
● Operations are also possible by touching [
], [ ], [ ], and
[
] on the top of the screen in step 2.
121
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
3
Correct the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
● Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(=
110).
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
● Press the [
] button and follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (=
118).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
● You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]
on the screen in step 4.
● [ ]: To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press
the [
][ ] buttons on the screen in step 2. To move the frame,
press the [
][ ] buttons again. To return the frame to horizontal
orientation, press the [
][ ] buttons.
● The same operations are available by pressing the [
]
button and choosing [
2] tab > [Creative lters], choosing an
image, and pressing the [
] button.
● You can also adjust the effect by touching or dragging the bar on
the bottom of the screen in step 2. For [
], you can also move
the frame by touching or dragging across the screen.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ 3]
tab (=
35).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
122
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
5
Save the image.
● If you have chosen [ ], press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ].
Press the [ ] button, choose [OK] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button
again.
● If you have chosen [
], press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
Brightness adjustment Adjust brightness.
White balance Choose a white balance.
Picture Style Choose a Picture Style.
Auto Lighting Optimizer Set Auto Lighting Optimizer details.
High ISO speed NR Set noise reduction details.
Image quality
Set the image quality level of the resulting
JPEG image.
Peripheral illum corr Correct vignetting from lens characteristics.
Chromatic aberr corr
Correct chromatic aberration from lens
characteristics.
Diffraction correction Correct loss of sharpness from diffraction.
Processing RAW Images with the
Camera
Still Images
Movies
Process images captured in RAW format on the camera. The original
RAW image is retained, and a copy is saved as a JPEG.
1
Choose a RAW image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a RAW image.
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and choose [ ]
in the menu. Choose the desired option
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial).
● When choosing [
], go to step 5.
3
Set the processing conditions.
● If you have chosen [ ], press the [ ]
button, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to choose an option, and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Congure advanced settings.
● Choose an effect (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button to return to the
screen in step 3.
123
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (=
123), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(=
112), [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
● Press the [
] button to go to the
next screen.
3
Process the image.
● Follow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images with the Camera” (=
122) to
process the image.
● You can also choose an effect for a selected processing condition
on the screen in step 3 by turning the [
] dial.
● For magnied display on the screen in step 3, turn the [
] dial
counterclockwise.
● You can compare the current image to the original image by
pressing the [
] button and turning the [ ] dial on the
screen in step 3. To return to the setting screen, press the
[
] button.
● To restore the original settings, on the screen in step 3, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● You can congure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[
] on the screen in step 4 by pressing the [ ] button.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[RAW img processing] on the [ 3] tab
(=
35).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose an option as desired (=
35).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
124
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies
(excluding digest movies, =
41).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(=
103), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
● The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
● To specify a portion to cut (indicated by
[
]), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to move the orange [ ] or
[ ] icon. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
● If you move [
] or [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion
before the nearest [ ] mark on the left
will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after
the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be
cut.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (=
119), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
113) to specify images.
3
Process the image.
● Follow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images with the Camera” (=
122) to
process the image.
● Images produced by in-camera processing will not match those
processed with Digital Photo Professional exactly.
● Up to 500 images can be selected at one time.
● When processing images from the menu, use the [
][ ] buttons
to choose a desired item.
125
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
● On the screen in step 4 of “Editing
Movies” (=
124), choose [ ]. Choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [
] button.
The image quality after compression is as follows.
Before Compression After Compression
● [ ] and [ ] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
3
Review the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
● To cancel editing, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Save the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
● The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, if possible, use a fully charged battery pack,
or insert a DC coupler and connect an AC adapter (both sold
separately, =
167).
126
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Editing Digest Movies
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (=
41) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
● Play a movie recorded in [ ] mode as
described in steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (=
106), and
then press the [ ] button to access the
movie control panel.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
127
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Wireless Features
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
● Before using wireless features, be sure to read “Precautions for
Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others)” (=
220).
Available Wireless Features
Using Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot as you view a shooting screen on your
smartphone or tablet. For convenience in this guide, smartphones,
tablets, and other compatible devices are collectively referred to as
“smartphones”.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
● Media Player
View images on DLNA*-compatible TVs or other devices.
* Digital Living Network Alliance
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Using Bluetooth
®
Features
You can easily pair the camera with a smartphone featuring Bluetooth
low energy technology*. You can also shoot or view images by using your
smartphone as a remote control.
* Hereafter referred to as “Bluetooth”.
128
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Transferring Images to a Bluetooth Enabled
Smartphone
Once you have paired with a smartphone via Bluetooth, simply operate
your smartphone to view and save camera images.
1
Install Camera Connect.
● For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
● For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Register a nickname.
● Turn on the camera.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Nickname].
● Press the [
] button to access the
keyboard (=
37), and then enter a
nickname.
● To return to [Wireless settings] after
pressing the [
] button, press the
[ ] button again.
Transferring Images to a
Smartphone
Transfer images to a smartphone as follows.
● Connect via Bluetooth (=
128)
You can easily connect the camera to a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
by pairing them. This simplies transferring images to a smartphone.
● Connect via NFC (=
130)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone against the
camera to connect the devices.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (=
132)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use EOS Remote to
connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should consider
switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
129
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Press the [ ] button when the screen at
left is displayed.
7
Transfer images.
● The camera will automatically switch to
Wi-Fi if you choose [Images on camera]
in Camera Connect.
● On an iPhone or iPad, in the device’s
Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID
(network name) displayed on the camera
to establish a connection.
● Use the smartphone to transfer images
from the camera to the smartphone.
● To switch to Bluetooth, disable the Wi-Fi
connection on the smartphone.
● Battery life may be shorter when you use the camera after pairing,
because power is consumed even when power saving is active.
● Bluetooth connection status is indicated by one of the following
icons.
- [
]: Connected, [ ]: Disconnected
● You can also use the camera to disable Wi-Fi connection
described in step 7.
● To disable Bluetooth communication, choose MENU (=
35)
> [
4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth settings] and set
[Bluetooth] to [Off].
● To check the information of the smartphone connected via
Bluetooth in [Check/clear connection info], choose MENU
(=
35) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth settings].
Choose [Address check] to check the camera’s Bluetooth address.
3
Prepare for pairing.
● Choose [Bluetooth settings], press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Pairing], and then press the [ ]
button.
● A screen is displayed indicating that the
camera is waiting to connect.
4
Start Camera Connect.
● Activate Bluetooth on the smartphone,
and then start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
● After the camera is recognized, a camera
selection screen is displayed.
5
Select the camera to connect to.
● Choose the camera nickname.
● Complete the pairing process for the
smartphone.
6
Complete pairing.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK] after the conrmation
message on the camera, and then press
the [ ] button.
130
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Establish the connection.
● Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
● The camera screen automatically
changes.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Camera Connect starts up on the
smartphone, and the devices are
connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
● When this screen is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [All images], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse,
transfer, or geotag images on the
camera.
Transferring Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android smartphone’s NFC to simplify the process of installing
Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
● If the camera is in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
while viewing a shooting screen on the smartphone, or geotag your
shots (=
149). It’s easy to reconnect to recent devices, which are
listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Shooting
Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Refer to the smartphone user manual to
check where the N-Mark (
) is located.
● Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks (
) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
131
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (=
153).
● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (=
35) > [ 4] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off].
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback
Mode
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
● Touch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (=
130) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
● After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The images are now sent.
● To end the connection, clear [
] from all
images, press the [ ] button, and
then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [OK].
4
Send an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
● For remote live view shooting, choose [All images] in step 3.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [All images] in step 3. To restrict
camera images that can be viewed from the smartphone, choose
a different option in step 3 (=
152). Once you have registered a
smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it on the camera
(=
152).
132
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
5
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
● In the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
6
Start Camera Connect.
● Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
7
Choose the camera to connect to.
● On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
● If during connection a message on the camera or smartphone
requests you to enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Connecting
via NFC When Camera Is in Shooting Mode” (=
130) to enter it.
● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (=
134).
1
Install Camera Connect.
● For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
● For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [
] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
133
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (=
153).
● You can also access the screen in step 3 by choosing MENU
(=
35) > [ 4] tab > [Wi-Fi connect’n].
● To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU
(=
35) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 4).
● Once you have connected to devices, recent destinations will
be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily
connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a new device,
display the device selection screen by pressing the [
][ ]
buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
35) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
8
Adjust the privacy setting.
● When this screen is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [All images], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse,
import, or geotag images on the camera.
9
Send an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
● For remote live view shooting, choose [All images] in step 8.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [All images] in step 8. To restrict
camera images that can be viewed from the smartphone, choose
a different option in step 8 (=
152). Once you have registered a
smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it on the camera
(=
152).
134
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (=
35)
> [
4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC
Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
2
Prepare for the connection.
● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Connecting
to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(=
132).
3
Choose [Switch Network].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
● A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Interface” (=
216).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, =
134) or not (=
135). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
135
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
● View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 3 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(=
134).
2
Choose an access point.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Enter the access point password.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(=
37).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
5
Send the images.
● Follow steps 6 – 9 in “Connecting to
a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(=
132) to choose the smartphone,
adjust the privacy setting, and send the
images.
4
Choose [WPS Connection].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [PBC Method].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
6
Establish the connection.
● On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
● On the camera, press the [
] button to
go to the next step.
7
Send the images.
● Follow steps 6 – 9 in “Connecting to
a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(=
132) to choose the smartphone,
adjust the privacy setting, and send the
images.
● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 5, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
136
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
● For CANON iMAGE GATEWAY instructions and setting details, refer to
the help information for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
● CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
● Passwords of access points you have already connected to are
displayed as [*] in step 3. To use the same password, choose
[Next] (either press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and
press the [
] button.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(=
132).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=
134)
from step 4 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(=
135) from step 2.
137
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Establish a connection with an
access point.
● Connect to the access point as described
in steps 4 – 6 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (=
134) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(=
135).
5
Enter your email address.
● Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
● Enter your email address, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Enter a four-digit number.
● Enter a four-digit number of your choice,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notication message for completing linkage
settings.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
● Read the agreement displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [I Agree], and then press the [ ]
button.
138
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not congured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notication message.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 1 (=
153).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
● From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
● Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
7
Check for the notication message.
● Once information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notication message at the
email address entered in step 5.
● Press the [
] button on the next screen,
which indicates that notication has been
sent.
● [
] now changes to [ ].
8
Access the page in the notication
message and complete camera link
settings.
● From a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notication
message.
● Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
9
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● [
] (=
147) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
● You can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
instructions from step 2 in “Registering
Other Web Services” (=
138).
139
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
3
Send an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
● When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [
] button.
● Press the [
] button to return to the
playback screen once [OK] is displayed
after the image is sent.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (=
144).
● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
2
Choose the destination.
● Choose the icon of the Web service to
connect to (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
● If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
140
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Once the camera is ready for the
media player connection, this screen is
displayed. The screen will be dimmed
after a while.
● After the devices are connected, use the
media player to view images. For details,
refer to the media player’s user manual.
4
Display the media player settings
screen on your TV set.
● On the media player, display
[ Canon EOS M5].
● A different icon may be displayed
depending on the media player. Find an
icon labeled [
Canon EOS M5].
5
Display images.
● Choose [ Canon EOS M5] > memory
card (SD or other card) > folder > images.
● Select an image to display it on the media
player. For details, refer to the media
player’s user manual.
● When nished, press the [
] button on
the camera to end the connection. If the
screen is dimmed, press any button.
Once the second screen in step 3 is
displayed, press the [
] button.
Viewing Images Using a Media
Player
View images on the camera’s memory card on a TV or other device.
This feature requires a DLNA-compatible TV set or other media player,
such as a game system or smartphone. In this manual, the term “media
player” is used to refer to any such device.
Follow these instructions only after the media player is connected to an
access point. For relevant instructions, refer to the device’s user manual.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Establish a connection with an
access point.
● Connect to the access point as described
in steps 4 – 6 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (=
134) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(=
135).
141
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (=
134).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● Past media player connections are listed as “MediaServ.”
● RAW images and movies are not displayed.
● Information overlay and details displayed on the TV set vary
depending on the media player. Some media players may
not display image information, or may display vertical images
horizontally.
● Icons labeled with a range of numbers such as “1-100” contain
images grouped by le number in the selected folder.
● Dates shown for cards or folders may be the date on the camera
when last viewed.
142
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
35) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● When using another access point, see “Using Another Access
Point” (=
134).
4
Connect the printer to the network.
● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Choose the printer.
● Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose an image to print.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
● For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (=
178).
● To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
143
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Send an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
35) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (=
144).
Sending Images to Another
Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras can be connected via Wi-Fi.
You cannot connect to a Canon camera unless it is Wi-Fi compatible,
even if it supports FlashAir/Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
● Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
144
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (=
144), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
● After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You can also choose images in step 2 by turning the [ ]
dial counterclockwise to access single-image display and then
pressing the [
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1
Choose [Select and send].
● On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method.
145
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Sending Rated Images
Send multiple images with the same rating (=
117).
1
Choose [Rating Images].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (=
144), choose [Rating
Images] and press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a rating, and then press
the [ ] button. An image selection screen
is displayed that includes only images
with that rating.
● You can also remove images from the
group to send, by choosing an image and
pressing the [
] button to clear the [ ]
mark.
● After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[
] button.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (=
144), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
113) to specify images.
● To include movies, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
146
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
● On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
37).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
Notes on Sending Images
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial) and press the [ ] button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [
] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
147
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (=
35).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then choose [Stills/
Movies] (=
35).
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install Image Transfer Utility.
● Install Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
(=
176).
● Image Transfer Utility can also be
downloaded from the Image Sync
settings page of CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (=
147).
2
Register the camera.
● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
], and
then click [Add new camera].
● A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
● Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, you will
install and congure Image Transfer Utility, free software compatible with
Image Sync.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(=
137).
● To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (=
136), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
148
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (=
147).
● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (=
136), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images
to Web Services” (=
139) and choose
[ ].
● Sent images are labeled with a [
] icon.
2
Save the images to the computer.
● Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
● Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =
167).
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
149
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a
Smartphone
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi
You can shoot as you view a shooting screen on your smartphone.
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow viewing
of all images from the smartphone (=
152).
1
Secure the camera.
● Keep the camera still by mounting it on a
tripod or taking other measures.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
132
).
● In the privacy settings, choose [All
images].
3
Choose remote live view shooting.
● In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Remote live view shooting].
● Once the camera is ready for remote
live view shooting, a live image from the
camera is displayed on the smartphone.
● At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all camera operations
except using the power switch are
disabled.
4
Shoot.
● Use the smartphone to shoot.
Using a Smartphone to View
Camera Images and Control the
Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images on the camera (=
149)
● Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (=
149)
● In camera settings, the smartphone must be allowed to view
camera images (=
132, =
151).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (=
21). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (=
159)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
150
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Shoot and switch images.
● Use the smartphone to shoot in Shooting
mode and switch images in Playback
mode.
● [Bluetooth remote controller] is not available when connected via
Wi-Fi.
● You can check the Bluetooth connection status by referring to the
icon on the screen (=
192).
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Focusing may take longer.
● Image display or shutter release may be delayed, depending on
the connection status.
● Any rough subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and transfer images from the camera.
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth
You can use a Bluetooth enabled smartphone for remote shooting and
switching of image display.
This is convenient if you want to connect quickly while shooting, or if you
will control playback while connected to a TV.
1
Prepare the camera.
● Set the shooting mode and the shooting
functions on the camera.
● Keep the camera still by mounting it on
a tripod or taking other measures when
shooting.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
128).
● Make sure that the Bluetooth connection
has been established.
3
Choose Bluetooth remote controller.
● In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Bluetooth remote controller].
● The smartphone screen changes to a
screen for remote control via Bluetooth.
151
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Choose the item to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
● The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
Change Device Nickname (=
151)
O O O
– –
View Settings (=
152)
–
O
– – –
Erase Connection Info (=
152)
O O O
– –
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
151), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
● Select the input eld and press the [
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (=
37).
Editing or Erasing Wireless
Settings
Edit or erase wireless settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to access
the device selection screen, choose
the icon of a device to edit (press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
152
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
2
Choose and set an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
● After choosing [All images] or [Images
shot today]: Press the [
] button.
● After choosing [Images shot in past
days]: Press the [
] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons on the next screen to
specify the number of days, and then
press the [ ] button.
● After choosing [Select by rating]: Press
the [
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the next screen to choose the rating,
and then press the [ ] button.
● After choosing [File number range]:
Press the [
] button, specify the rst and
last number on the next screen, choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
For instructions on specifying the range,
see steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
113).
● For remote live view shooting, choose [All images].
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
151), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The connection information will be
erased.
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones
Specify which images on the camera’s memory card can be viewed from
smartphones connected to the camera.
Setting Option Images Viewable from Smartphones
All images All images on the memory card
Images shot today Images shot that day
Images shot in past days
Images shot within the specied number
of days
Select by rating
Image with the specied rating (=
117)
File number range
Images in the specied range of le
numbers
The same instructions can be followed when the screen in step 2 is
displayed after you establish a connection with a smartphone.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
151), choose [View
Settings] and press the [ ] button.
153
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Returning the Wireless Settings to Default
Return the wireless settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the wireless settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(=
35).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The wireless settings are now reset.
● To reset settings other than wireless settings to defaults, choose
[Reset camera] on the [
4] tab (=
163).
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(=
35).
2
Choose [Nickname].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the nickname.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (=
37), and then enter a
nickname.
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you rst use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [
] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
154
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via
Bluetooth
Before pairing with a different smartphone, clear the information about any
connected smartphones.
1
Choose [Bluetooth settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth
settings].
2
Choose [Check/clear connection
info].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Check/clear connection
info], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Clear the information.
● On the [Check/clear connection info]
screen, press the [ ] button.
● After [Clear information about devices
you have connected to] is displayed,
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Clear the camera information.
● In the Bluetooth setting menu on the
smartphone, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
155
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
Adjusting Basic Camera
Functions
MENU (=
35) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], and [ 4] tabs can be
congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
● Choose [Create Folder] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
● Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
● Choose [File Numbering] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
cards, or when a new folder is created.
156
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (=
156), press the
[ ] button to choose [Low Level
Format]. A [ ] icon is displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (=
156) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (=
156), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Cancel]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted, =
156) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
● Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [OK].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Format the memory card.
● To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● When formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [
] button.
157
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
● Choose [Electronic level] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
button.
● Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
● [
] is now shown on the shooting
screen (=
191).
● The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
● To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off and the
indicator is blinking, press the shutter
button halfway.
Changing the Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
● Choose [Video system] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (=
95) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1
Make sure the camera is level.
● Place the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2
Calibrate the electronic level.
● Choose [Electronic level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [
] button. A
conrmation message is displayed.
● Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
158
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Screen Brightness
Screen and viewnder brightness can be set separately. Before
adjustment, make sure the display to adjust is activated.
● Choose [
2] tab > [Disp. Brightness],
press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button
for at least one second. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness]
setting on the [
2] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press
and hold the [
] button again for at least one second or
restart the camera.
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions.
● Choose [Night Display] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [On].
● To restore the original display, choose
[Off].
● You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the
[
] button for at least one second.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (=
31).
● Choose [Power Saving] on the [
2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose an item and press the [
] button.
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to adjust the setting, and then press
the [ ] button again.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [1 min.]
for [Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (=
157) to [On].
159
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
● Choose [Date/Time] on the [
2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
● Choose [Language
] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode
by pressing and holding the [
] button and then pressing the
[
] button.
Muting Camera Sounds
Prevent the camera from playing sounds when you press the shutter
button halfway or activate the self-timer.
● Choose [Beep] on the [
3] tab, and then
choose [Off].
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=
21).
1
Specify your destination.
● Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [
] button.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is now shown on the shooting screen
(=
191).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (=
22) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
160
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
● Choose [
3] tab > [Touch Operation], and
then choose the desired option.
● To increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
● Take the following precautions when using the touch-screen
panel.
- The screen is not pressure sensitive. Do not use sharp objects
such as ngernails or ballpoint pens for touch operations.
- Do not perform touch-screen operations when your ngers are
wet.
- If you perform touch-screen operations when the screen or
your ngers are wet, the camera may not respond, or it may
malfunction. In this case, turn the camera off and wipe the
screen with a cloth.
- Do not apply screen protectors or adhesive lm purchased
separately. This may reduce the responsiveness of touch
operations.
● The camera may be less responsive if you perform touch
operations quickly when the setting is set to [Sensitive].
Activating Camera Sounds
Sounds can be played as feedback after camera operations, such as
pressing buttons or touching the screen.
● Choose [Operation Vol.] on the [
3] tab,
and then choose [On].
Hiding Hints and Tips
Guidance is normally shown when you choose items in the Quick Set
menu (=
34) or on the shooting screen (=
69). If you prefer, you
can deactivate this information.
● Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [
3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon
List shooting modes on the selection screen by icon only, without mode
names, for faster selection.
● Choose [Mode icon size/info] on the [
3]
tab, and then choose [Small, no info].
161
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Activating Sensor Cleaning
1
Access the setting screen.
● Turn the camera on in Shooting mode,
choose [Sensor cleaning] on the [ 3] tab,
and press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Clean now ], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Start cleaning.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● A message is displayed indicating that
cleaning is in progress. Although there
will be a shutter sound, a picture is not
taken.
● The sensor cleaning also works while no lens is attached. If no
lens is attached, do not insert your nger or a blower tip past the
lens mount, which may damage the shutter curtains.
● For best results, clean with the camera placed upright on a desk
or other surface.
● Repeated cleaning will not produce notably better results. Note
that [Clean now
] may not be available immediately after
cleaning.
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk regarding dust or
other material that cannot be removed by sensor cleaning.
Cleaning the Image Sensor
The image sensor is automatically cleaned to remove dust whenever you
turn the camera on or off, or when the camera shuts off in Power Saving
mode. You can disable automatic cleaning or activate cleaning as needed.
Disabling Auto Cleaning
1
Access the setting screen.
● Turn the camera on in Shooting mode,
choose [Sensor cleaning] on the [ 3] tab,
and press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto cleaning ], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Disable], and then press
the [ ] button.
162
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
● Choose [Copyright Info] on the [
4] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (=
37).
● Press the [
] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [
] button.
● You can also use EOS Utility (=
176) to enter, change, or delete
copyright information on the camera. Some characters entered
with the software may not display on the camera, but will be
correctly recorded in images.
● You can check copyright information recorded in images by using
the software, once you save the images to a computer.
● Download the EOS Utility instruction manual from the Canon
website as needed. For downloading instructions, see “Software
Instruction Manual” (=
176).
Cleaning the Sensor Manually
Any dust that remains after automatic cleaning can also be removed by
using an optional blower or other specialized tool.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor must
be cleaned manually, we recommend requesting service from a Canon
Customer Support Help Desk.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Detach the lens.
3
Clean the sensor.
● The image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with
care.
● Use a blower without a brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
● Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens
mount. It can damage the shutter curtains.
● Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing
force can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the
sensor.
● If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains,
having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk is recommended.
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
● Choose [Certication Logo Display] on
the [
4] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
163
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
● Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(=
162) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted.
● [Wireless settings] ([
4] tab) (=
127)
● [Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)] ([
4] tab) (=
100)
● [
rmware ver.] ([ 4] tab) (used for rmware updates)
● During rmware updates, the touch-screen panel will be disabled
to prevent accidental operations.
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Restoring All Camera Defaults
1
Access the [Basic settings] screen.
● Choose [Reset camera] on the [ 4] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Basic settings], and then
press the [
] button.
2
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● All camera defaults are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- [
1] tab setting [Video system] (=
157)
- [
2] tab settings [Time Zone] (=
159), [Date/Time] (=
159),
and [Language
] (=
159)
- [
5] tab settings [External ash func. setting] and [External
ash C.Fn setting] in [Flash Control]
- [
1] Tab
- Exposure compensation (=
69) setting
- Shooting mode (=
56)
- Wireless settings (=
127)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (=
157)
- Copyright information (=
163)
164
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions
Settings for the following functions can be restored to defaults individually.
● User settings for custom shooting modes
● [
5] tab settings [Built-in ash settings], [External ash func. setting],
and [External ash C.Fn setting] in [Flash Control]
● [
1] Tab
● Wireless settings
● Calibrated value for the electronic level
● Copyright information
1
Access the [Other settings] screen.
● Choose [Reset camera] on the [ 4] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Other settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the function to reset.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the function to reset, and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Default function settings are now
restored.
165
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such
malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
166
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
System Map
ST-E3-RT430EX
III-RT/
430EX III
430EX II600EX
II-RT
600EX-RT/
600EX
270EX II Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
ST-E2*
1
Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU
*
2
AC Adapter
CA-PS700
Included Accessories
Battery Charger
LC-E17/LC-E17E
*
2
Battery Pack
LP-E17
*
2
Body Jacket
EH29-CJ
Neck Strap
EM-E2
Neck Strap
EM-300DB
*
2
USB Port
Card Slot
Remote Controller
RC-6
TV/Video System
Computer
PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
Card Reader
SD/SDHC/SDXC
Memory Card
Directional Stereo Microphone
DM-E1
Connect Station
CS100
EF Lenses EF-S LensesEF-M Lenses
Mount Adapter
EF-EOS M
HDMI Cable
(camera end:
Type D)
DC Coupler
DR-E17
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
*1 With some lenses, Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3 may be required.
*2 Also available for purchase separately.
167
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
AC Adapter CA-PS700
● For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
DC Coupler DR-E17
● Used with an AC adapter.
● The battery charger and AC adapter can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Lenses
EF-M, EF, and EF-S Lenses
● Switch lenses to suit the subject or your preferred shooting style. Note
that EF and EF-S lenses require Mount Adapter EF-EOS M.
Mount Adapter EF-EOS M
● Use this mount adapter when attaching
EF or EF-S lenses.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack LP-E17
● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E
● Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17
168
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Microphone
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1
● When movies are recorded, any sounds
of lens and camera operations that are
picked up by the microphone will be
quieter.
Other Accessories
Remote Switch RS-60E3
● Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Remote Controller RC-6
● Enables remote shooting on a camera
you have set up.
Body Jacket EH29-CJ
● Protects the camera from dust and
scratches.
Flash Units
Speedlite 600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/600EX/
430EX III-RT/430EX III/430EX II/270EX II
● Shoe-mounted ash unit that enables
many styles of ash photography.
Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX, 550EX,
430EX, 420EX, 380EX, 320EX, 270EX,
220EX, and 90EX are also supported.
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT/ST-E2
● Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite ash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
● Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3 may be
required when using ST-E2 with certain
lenses.
Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX
Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II
● External macro ash unit that enables
many styles of macro ash photography.
MR-14EX is also supported.
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3
● Connection cord for using a Speedlite
without mounting it on the camera.
169
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2 ft.,
with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
quality of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[ ] can be viewed in high denition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Neck Strap EM-E2
● Strap made of the same material as Body
Jacket EH29-CJ.
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
● For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
● Rings and caps included with Neck Strap EM-300DB are required
when attaching Neck Strap EM-E2.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
● Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Photo and Movie Storage
Connect Station CS100
● A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
170
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images
Movies
Powering the camera with both AC Adapter CA-PS700 and DC Coupler
DR-E17 (both sold separately) eliminates the need to monitor the
remaining battery level.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Insert the coupler.
● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (=
20) to
open the cover.
● Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
facing as shown, insert the coupler just
as you would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Memory Card” (=
20)).
● Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (=
20) to
close the cover.
3
Connect the adapter to the coupler.
● Open the cover and insert the adapter
plug fully into the coupler.
4
Connect the power cord.
● Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
● Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
● When nished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
● Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
● When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, display cannot be magnied (=
110) and Night
Display (=
158) is not available.
171
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1
Connect the remote switch.
● Make sure the camera is off.
● Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
2
Shoot.
● Turn the camera on.
● To shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
Using the Hot Shoe
Use the hot shoe to attach an optional external ash or microphone.
1
Remove the hot shoe cap.
● Pull off the cap as shown.
● To avoid losing the cap, place it in
the case for your external ash or
microphone.
2
Attach the hot shoe cap.
● After removing the external ash or
microphone, reattach the cap to protect
the hot shoe.
● Insert the cap as shown.
(
1
)
(
2
)
● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
Shooting Remotely
Use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately) to shoot from up to approx.
5 meters (16.4 ft.) in front of the camera.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
44) and choose [ ].
● Aim the Remote Controller at the
camera’s remote control sensor and
press the transmit button to shoot.
● The camera does not shoot unless subjects are in focus.
● Shutter release may be triggered accidentally by any uorescent
or LED lighting nearby. Use the camera as far away from these
light sources as possible.
● Operating a TV remote control or similar device aimed at the
camera may trigger accidental shutter release.
172
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Keep cords (from the macro ring lite or macro twin lite, as well as
the off-camera shoe cord) away from ash heads.
● When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the
ash heads from coming into contact with the legs.
● Settings for the built-in ash cannot be congured while a
Speedlite EX series ash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
● You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [
] button
for at least one second.
● The AF-assist beam on the external ash will not re.
Setting External Flash Functions
When an external ash is attached, congure the following settings in
MENU (=
35) > [ 5] tab > [Flash Control].
● Flash ring (=
82)
● E-TTL II metering (=
84)
● Red-eye reduction (=
51)
● Safety FE (=
83)
● External ash function settings (=
172)
● External ash Custom Function settings (=
174)
● Clear settings (=
174)
● Choose [External ash func. setting] and
press the [
] button to access the screen
at left.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an item, and then
press the [ ] button. On the screen
displayed, choose an option (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
More sophisticated ash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series ash.
● Non-EX series Canon ash units may not re correctly or may not
re at all, in some cases.
● Use of non-Canon ash units (especially high-voltage ash units)
or ash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
● Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information. This camera is a Type-A camera that supports all
features of EX-series Speedlites.
1
Attach the ash.
● Make sure the camera is off, and then
attach the ash unit.
2
Turn the ash on, and then turn the
camera on.
● An orange [ ] icon is now displayed.
● The ash pilot lamp will light up when the
ash is ready.
3
Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ].
● Flash settings can only be congured in
these modes. In other modes, the ash
is adjusted and red automatically, as
needed.
4
Congure the external ash
(=
172).
173
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Setting Option Description
Flash exposure
compensation
Enables adjustment of exposure compensation
at the moment the ash res. For details, refer
to the instruction manual of the ash unit. If ash
exposure compensation is set on the ash, it
cannot be set on the camera. If it is set on both
the camera and ash, the ash setting takes
precedence.
Flash output
level
Congure the ash output level. For details, refer to
the instruction manual of the ash unit. If it is set on
both the camera and ash, the ash setting takes
precedence.
Flash exposure
bracketing
Activates FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing), which
takes three shots while automatically changing
the ash output. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of ash units compatible with ash
exposure bracketing.
Flash count/
Flash frequency
Set the ash count and frequency when [Flash
Mode] is set to [MULTI].
Ratio control
Set the relative ash output level in wireless (multi-
ash) ash shooting or with the MR-14EX II.
● [Built-in ash settings] is not available when an external ash is
attached.
● Information displayed and available setting items vary depending
on the type of ash unit, current ash mode, ash Custom
Function settings, and other factors. For details on the functions
available with your ash unit, refer to the instruction manual of the
ash unit.
● With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with ash function
settings, only [Flash Exp. Comp] can be adjusted. ([Shutter
synchronization] can also be set for some EX-series Speedlites.)
Setting Option Description
Flash Mode
Choose a ash mode to suit your desired ash
shooting.
● [E-TTL II ash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites that can re
automatically.
● Use [Manual ash] mode if you will decide the
[Flash output level] of the ash unit yourself.
● For details on other ash modes, refer to the
instruction manual of a ash compatible with
those modes.
Wireless Func.
Enables wireless ash shooting with multiple ash
units. When shooting with multiple ashes, you can
also congure the radio channel, optical channel,
and master ash ring. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of ash units compatible with
wireless ash shooting.
Flash zoom
(ash coverage)
With ash units that have a zooming ash head,
you can set the ash coverage. Normally, choose
[AUTO] to have the camera automatically set the
ash coverage to match the lens focal length.
Shutter
synchronization
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release
as follows.
● [
]: The ash res immediately after the
shutter opens.
● [
]: The ash res immediately before the
second curtain closes. If the shutter speed is
1/100 sec. or faster, rst-curtain synchronization
is used automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
● [
]: The ash can be used at all shutter
speeds. Especially effective when shooting
portraits using ll ash, to give priority to the
aperture setting.
174
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Using External Microphones (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
Using Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) can reduce
the sound of lens and camera operations that may be recorded in movies.
Note that the built-in microphone is not used for recording when an
external microphone is connected.
● Also refer to the DM-E1 instruction manual.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Attach the external microphone to
the hot shoe.
● Insert the directional stereo microphone
into the hot shoe (=
4) as shown.
● Move the lever to the [LOCK] side.
3
Connect the microphone output
plug.
● Connect the microphone output plug
to the external microphone IN terminal
(=
4) as shown.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Setting External Flash Custom Functions
For details on Custom Functions for ash units, refer to the instruction
manual of the ash (sold separately).
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Flash Control] on the [ 5] tab, choose
[External ash C.Fn setting] and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the screen displayed,
choose an option (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● For full ash ring when you shoot, set [Flash metering mode] to
[1:TTL] (automatic ash metering) in [External ash C.Fn setting].
Restoring External Flash Defaults
Restore default [External ash func. setting] and [External ash C.Fn
setting] settings.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ 5]
tab > [Flash Control] > [Clear settings],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
● [Clear built-in ash set.] is not available when an external ash is
attached.
175
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Any attenuator settings you have congured are also applied to
recording with the external microphone (=
67).
● Connecting an external microphone will deactivate [Wind Filter]
(=
67).
● Recording is also possible by connecting a commercially available
microphone with a mini plug (3.5 mm diameter) to the external
microphone IN terminal.
4
Turn on the camera, and then the
external microphone.
● Slide the power switch of the external
microphone from [OFF] to [AUTO]. When
set to [AUTO], the microphone will be
automatically turned on and off in sync
with the camera power switch and Auto
Power Down feature.
5
Adjust microphone directivity to
match the subject.
● Use the microphone directivity switch to
set the directivity.
6
Remove when nished.
● After turning off the microphone, unplug
the output plug and remove it by following
the attachment instructions in reverse.
● The external microphone requires a battery for power. Replace
the battery when the power check lamp is no longer lit.
● When testing microphone operation, check by speaking instead of
tapping the microphone or breathing on it.
● When recording, do not touch the microphone, cable, or wind
screen. These sounds will be recorded.
● Noise may be recorded as a result of radio or high-voltage
interference from nearby radio towers, high-voltage power lines,
mobile phones, or other sources of strong electromagnetic waves.
● Noise may be recorded when wireless camera features are used.
For best results, avoid using wireless features when recording.
● Using the microphone where it is cold may cause recordings to
be distorted.
176
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Software Instruction Manual
Download software instruction manuals from the Canon website as
needed.
● With a computer connected to the
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/
icpd/.
● Access the site for your country or region.
Checking Your Computer Environment
For detailed software system requirements and compatibility information
(including support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
Installing the Software
1
Download the software.
● With a computer connected to the
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/
icpd/.
● Access the site for your country or region.
● Download the software.
2
Follow the instructions displayed.
● Double-click the downloaded le to install
it.
Using the Software
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
Software
After installing the software, you can do the following things on your
computer.
● EOS Utility
- Import images and change camera settings
● Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process, and edit photos, including RAW images
● Picture Style Editor
- Edit Picture Styles and create and save Picture Style les
● Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (=
147) and receive images
● Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
● To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
● Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
177
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
3
Save the images to the computer.
● Click [Download images to computer] >
[Start automatic download].
● Once images are saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer (in separate
folders named by date), Digital Photo
Professional starts up automatically and
displays the imported images.
● After images are saved, close EOS Utility,
slide the camera power switch to [
]
to turn it off, and disconnect the cable.
● Use Digital Photo Professional to view
images you save to a computer. To view
movies, use preinstalled or commonly
available software compatible with
movies recorded by the camera.
● The rst time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will
be installed, so it may take a few minutes until camera images are
accessible.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
Saving Images to a Computer
Use an interface cable (=
2) to connect the camera and save images
to the computer.
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
cable in the orientation shown, insert the
plug fully into the camera terminal (2).
● Insert the larger plug of the cable in the
computer’s USB port. For details about
USB connections on the computer, refer
to the computer user manual.
2
Turn on the camera and display EOS
Utility.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button.
● Windows: Double-click the EOS Utility
icon on the desktop.
● Mac OS: Click the EOS Utility icon in the
Dock.
● From now on, EOS Utility will start up
automatically when you connect the
camera to the computer and turn on the
camera.
(
1
)
(
2
)
178
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Turn the camera on.
● Move the power switch to [ ].
5
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
6
Access the printing screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
7
Print the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Printing now begins.
● To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
● When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (=
169).
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (sold separately) with an interface cable (=
2).
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
● Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3
Turn the printer on.
179
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (=
179) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
● A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
● To resize the frame, turn the [ ][ ]
dials.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To rotate the frame, press the [
]
button.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Print the image.
● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (=
178)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(=
178) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [
] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print (=
179).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(=
180).
180
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L
and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(=
180), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (=
179) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [
] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
● When choosing [N-up], press the [
]
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Print the image.
181
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, le
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
“Viewing” (=
103), you can also access the screen in step 1
here by pressing the [
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial to
choose [
] in the movie control panel and then pressing the [ ]
button.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (=
184) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
● RAW images cannot be included in print list.
3
Choose the printing area.
● On the screen in step 2, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cropping].
● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (=
179) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(=
178) to choose a movie. This screen
is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
3
Print the image.
182
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in MENU
(=
35) > [ 2] tab > [Date/Time] (=
21).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 3] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
and then press the [ ] button (=
35).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● You can now specify the number of
copies.
● If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [
] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 3] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and congure items as needed
(=
35).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear DPOF
data
On
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
Off
–
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
183
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Clearing All Images from the Print List
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
182), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and transferring them into the software on your
computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient
when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your
own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 3] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
3
Specify the number of prints.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
● To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
● Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
182), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
113) to specify images.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
182), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
184
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
183), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
183), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
183), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
185
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power switch is set to [
].
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (=
19).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (=
20).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (=
20).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
The camera makes a noise when turned on or off with an EF-M lens
attached.
● When you turn off the camera, the aperture narrows to prevent light from entering
the camera. This protects internal components.
186
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shots are blurry.
● Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
AF frames are orange and subjects remain out of focus when I press the
shutter button halfway.
● Before you press the shutter button halfway, try centering higher-contrast portions
of subjects. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly. These
approaches may help the camera focus, which is indicated by a green AF frame.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
82).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=
69).
● Adjust brightness by using the Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
72).
● Use AE lock or partial metering (=
70, =
70).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
39).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=
69).
● Use AE lock or partial metering (=
70, =
70).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (=
42).
● Shoot within ash range (=
213).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (=
83, =
93).
● Increase the ISO speed (=
71).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (=
213).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (=
39).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (=
83, =
93).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (=
71).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (=
56).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● The camera cannot shoot unless subjects are in focus. Wait until the frame turns
green, as you press the shutter button halfway and allow the camera to focus,
before attempting to shoot.
● In Playback mode (=
103), press the shutter button halfway (=
31).
Strange display on the screen under low light (=
34).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
[ ] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (=
42).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (=
42).
● Shoot with image stabilization (=
86).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (=
82).
● Increase the ISO speed (=
71).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case,
also disable image stabilization (=
86).
Shots are out of focus.
● Shoot with auto focus (AF).
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (=
31).
● Focusing is not possible if you are closer to the subject than the minimum
focusing distance of the lens. To determine the minimum focusing distance, check
the lens. The lens minimum focusing distance is measured from the [
] (focal
plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject.
● Set [AF-assist beam (LED) ring] to [Enable] (=
51).
● Conrm that you have deactivated any features you do not wish to use, such as
manual focus.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (=
78, =
79).
187
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time.
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=
156).
- Lower the image quality (=
49).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording.
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
The movie has still moments.
● With some lenses, movies may seem to be missing frames at moments when the
brightness changes signicantly.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (=
156).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (=
103) if the sound in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (=
62) or [ ] (=
65) mode
because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Shots are affected by linear noise or moiré.
● Some subjects make shots more susceptible to linear noise or moiré. This is more
likely to happen under the following conditions.
- Subjects have ne horizontal stripes or checkered patterns.
- The sun, lights, or other sources of bright light are visible on the shooting
screen, or are nearby.
In this case, taking the following steps may reduce noise or moiré.
- Resize the subject by changing the focusing distance or zooming in or out.
- Recompose the shot to keep sources of bright light off the shooting screen.
- Attach a lens hood to prevent bright light from shining into the lens.
● Images may also be affected by linear noise or moiré if you shift or tilt a TS-E
lens.
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
● Set [Red-eye reduc.] to [On] (=
51). The red-eye reduction lamp (=
4)
will light up for ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (=
121).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=
156).
Continuous shooting suddenly stops.
● Continuous shooting stops automatically to protect the camera after about 1,000
shots are taken at one time. Release the shutter button a moment before you
resume shooting.
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, “Shooting Tab”, “C.Fn Tab”, “INFO.
Quick Control”, and “Set Up Tab” (=
194 – =
209).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
● Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
188
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
● RAW images cannot be sent to the camera or displayed on TV sets. RAW images
selected for importing to a smartphone are imported as JPEG images. Note that
Image Sync can also send RAW images.
● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (=
147). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (=
146).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. Note that
images may take a long time to send even when [
] is displayed.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
No notication message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
● Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
● Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are congured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notication
message.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (=
153).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [B], and then
press the [
] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer
via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (=
151).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (=
136).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (=
128).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (=
216). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
189
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Unselectable image.
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Magnify* (=
110), Rotate* (=
116), Rating (=
117), Edit* (=
118), Print
List* (=
181), and Photobook Set-up* (=
183).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (=
113, =
115, =
183), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (=
181) or Photobook Set-up
(=
183). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (=
181) or Photobook Set-up (=
183) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (=
112), Erase
(=
114), Rating (=
117), Print List (=
181), or Photobook Set-up (=
183).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because
the highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has
been reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in
folders has been reached. On the [
1] tab of the menu (=
35), change [File
Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (=
155), or format the memory card (=
156).
Lens Error
● There is a communication problem between the camera and lens. Clean the lens
contacts and mount the lens correctly on the camera.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (=
20).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (=
20).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (=
20).
Memory card error (=
156)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(=
20), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (=
39, =
53,
=
68) or edit images (=
118). Either erase unneeded images (=
114) or
insert a memory card with enough free space (=
20).
Touch AF unavailable
● Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (=
194).
Touch AF canceled
● The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (=
79).
Charge the battery (=
19)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (=
112)
190
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (=
147) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
File Error
● Correct printing (=
178) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (=
180). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (=
134).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (=
134).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
191
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
(11) Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
72)
(12) White balance correction
(=
74)
(13) AE lock (=
70)
(14) Battery level (=
191)
(15) Bluetooth connection status
(=
128)
(16) Still image quality (compression,
recording pixel setting) (=
47)
(17) Recordable shots
(18) Maximum continuous shots
(19) Movie quality (recording pixel,
frame rate) (=
49)
(20) Remaining time
(21) Histogram (=
106)
(22) Quick Set menu (=
34)
(23) Manual focus (=
81)
(24) Movie AE lock (=
64)
(25) AF frame (=
77)
(26) Metering frame (=
70)
(27) Self-timer (=
44)
(28) Grid lines (=
34)
(29) Electronic level (=
50)
(30) Magnify (=
81)
(31) Shutter speed (=
90)
(32) Aperture value (=
91)
(33) Exposure compensation (=
69)
(34) Highlight tone priority (=
72)
(35) ISO speed (=
71)
(36) Camera shake warning (=
42)
(37) Audio recording mode (=
66)
(38) Attenuator (=
67)
(39) Wind filter (=
67)
(40) Time zone (=
159)
(41) Eco mode (=
157)
(42) Image stabilization (=
86)
(43) Digital IS (=
86)
(44) Auto level (=
51)
(45) Auto slow shutter (=
65)
(46) Exposure simulation (=
69)
(47) AF/MF indicator (=
64)
(48) Movie Servo AF (=
64)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon
[Charge the battery] Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately
On-Screen Information
When Shooting
(20)(18)(16)(14)
(17)(15) (19) (21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(36)
(38)(37)
(43)
(39) (40) (41) (42)
(44) (45) (46)
(47)
(48)
(32) (33) (34) (35)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
9
)
(
11
)
(
8
)
(
10
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(1) Shooting mode (=
194), Scene
icon (=
43)
(2) Flash mode (=
82)
(3) Flash exposure compensation
/ Flash output level (=
83,
=
93)
(4) Metering mode (=
70)
(5) Touch Shutter (=
46)
(6) Continuous shooting (=
46)
(7) High ISO speed noise reduction
(=
88)
(8) AEB (=
71)
(9) Picture Style (=
75)
(10) White balance (=
73)
192
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Info Display 2
(1) Shooting date/time
(2) Histogram
(3) Shooting mode
(4) Shutter speed
(5) Aperture value
(6) Exposure compensation level
(7) ISO speed
(8) Highlight tone priority
(9) White balance
(10) White balance correction
(11) Picture Style setting details
(12) Flash exposure compensation
(13) Metering mode
(14) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(15) Red-eye correction
(16) Image quality*
(17) Recording pixel setting
(18) Image size
* Cropped images are labeled with [ ].
Info Display 3
Shows the lens name, focal length, and an RGB histogram. Note that
long lens names may not be fully displayed. Information on the top of the
screen is the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 4
Shows white balance information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
During Playback
Info Display 1
(1) Current image / Total images
(2) Battery level
(3) Wi-Fi signal strength
(4) Bluetooth connection status
(5) Settings can be applied to [
]
mode
(6) Image Sync complete
(7) Edited*
1
(8) Rating
(9) Protection
(10) Folder number - File number
(11) Shutter speed
(12) Aperture value
(13) Exposure compensation level
(14) ISO speed
(15) Highlight tone priority
(16) Image quality*
2
*1 Displayed for images with a creative lter, resizing, cropping, or red-eye
correction applied.
*2 Cropped images are labeled with [
].
193
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (=
103).
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (=
178).
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (=
126) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=
126) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected, =
126)
Edit (=
124)
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
● To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or drag left or right.
Info Display 5
Shows Picture Style information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 6
Shows noise-reduction settings for long exposures and high ISO speeds.
Information on the top of the screen is the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 7
Shows lens correction data and information about correction of peripheral
illumination, chromatic aberration, and diffraction. Information on the top of
the screen is the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 8
Shows GPS information. Information on the top of the screen is the same
as for Info Display 2.
194
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
/
Exposure Compensation (=
69)
*1
O O O O
– –
*2
O
*2
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
ISO Speed (=
71)
AUTO *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
100 – 6400 *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
8000 – 25600 *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash (=
82)
Auto *1
– – –
O O O O
– –
O
–
O
– –
O
– –
O O O O O O O
– – –
On *1
O O O O
– –
O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O O
– – –
Slow Synchro *1
–
O
–
O
*3 *3
O
– – – – – – –
*3
– – – – – – – – – – – –
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
External Flash Firing (=
172)
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O O
– – –
Flash Exposure Compensation (=
83)
*1
O O O O
– –
*4
–
*4
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Output Level (=
93)
*1
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Aperture Value (=
91)
*1
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Shutter Speed (=
90)
*1
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Bulb Exposure (=
93)
*1
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Program Shift (=
70)
*1
– – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
AE Lock (=
64, =
70)
FE Lock (=
84)
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
AE Lock (during recording), Exposure Compensation
(=
64)
O O O O O
– – –
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
195
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
Manual Focus (=
81)*
5
*1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Manual Focus Switching When Recording Movies
(=
64)
O O O O O
– –
O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
Move AF Frame (=
79)
Center *1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O O
Periphery *1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
– – –
O O O O
Touch AF (=
79)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
– – –
O O O O
Face Select (=
79)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O
–
Magnied Display (=
81)
*1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Touch Shutter (=
46)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*6
O O
–
*6 *6
O
– – –
Change Display
(=
34, =
69)
Info Display 1/
Info Display 2/
No Information Display
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
INFO. Quick Control *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Set in [Brightness].
*3 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*4 Adjusted to suit the [Brightness] setting.
*5 Manual focus when set to MF using the switch on EF or EF-S lenses.
*6 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
196
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Quick Set Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
/
AF method (=
77)
*1
O O O O O O
*2
O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O
–
*1
O O O O
– –
*2
O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O
–
*1
O O O O
– –
*2
O
–
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AF operation (=
80)
*1
O O O O O O
*2
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– –
*2
O
– – – – –
O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
–
O
– – –
Image quality (=
47) For details, see “Shooting Tab” (=
198).
Movie
rec. size
(=
49)
When Set to
NTSC
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
/
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O
–
When Set to
PAL
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O O
/
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O
–
Drive mode (=
46)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O O
– –
O
–
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
*1
O O O O O
– –
O
–
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
Self-timer/Remote ctrl
(=
44)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ /
*1
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Self-Timer Settings
Custom
Timer
Delay *1
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shots *1
O O O O O
– –
O
–
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
197
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
White balance (=
73)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / / /
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Picture Style (=
75)
*1
O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O O O
–
O
– – – – – – – –
O O O
*1
O O O O
– –
O
–
O
– – – – –
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / /
/ / /
/ /
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Metering mode (=
70)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ /
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(=
72)
*1
O O O O
– –
O
–
O
– – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O
/
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
*1
O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – –
O O
–
Still Image Aspect Ratio
(=
49)
*1
O O O O O
–
*4
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*5 *5
O
*1
O O O O O O
*4
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
– – –
*1
O O O O O
–
*4
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*5 *5
–
*1
O O O O O
–
*4
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
– – –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Functions can be congured on the [
3] tab.
*3 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (=
62).
*4 Functions can be congured on the [
1] tab.
*5 Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
198
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
/
1
Image quality (=
47)
JPEG
–
*1
O O O O O
– –
O
–
O
–
– –
–
– – – – – – – – – –
O O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / / / /
*1
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
RAW
–
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O O
– –
O
–
O
–
– –
–
– – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Still Image Aspect Ratio (=
49) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Shooting information display (=
95)
Screen info/
toggle settings
Custom display 1/
Custom display 2/
No info display/
INFO. Quick Control
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
VF info/ toggle
settings
No info display/
Custom display 1/
Custom display 2
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
VF vertical display
On *1
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
Off *1
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O
O O O
Grid display
3x3
/6x4 /
3x3+diag
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Histogram
Brightness/
RGB
Brightness/
RGB
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Display size
Large/
Small
*1
O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Expo. simulation
(=
69)
Enable *1
O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Disable *1
O O O O
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Reverse Display
(=
33)
On *1
O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off *1
O O O O O
O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
199
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
2
Display Mode
(=
32)
Display
priority
Power
Saving
*1
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
Smooth *1
O O O O O
– – – – – – – –
–
– – – – – – – – – –
– – –
VF display format
(=
32)
Display 1/Display 2 *1
O O O O
O O
O O
–
O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Image review
(=
52)*
2
Off/2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./
Hold
*1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Touch Shutter
(=
46)
Touch
Shutter
Enable *1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O
– – –
Disable *1
O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
AF frame
pos’n
Center/
Touch point
*1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
– – –
O
– – –
Touch & drag AF
settings (=
95)
Touch &
drag AF
Enable/
Disable
*1
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
O
– –
O O O O
Pos’n
method
Absolute/
Relative
*1
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
O
O O
–
O O O
– –
O O O O
Active
touch area
Whole
panel/
Right/Left/
Top right/
Btm. right/
Top left/
Btm. left
*1
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
– –
O O O O
Quick setting menu layout (=
99)
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
200
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
3
AF operation (=
80) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
AF method (=
77) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
AF Frame Size*
3
(=
78)
Normal *1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O
– –
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
Small *1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
O O O O
–
–
O O
–
O O
–
O O O
– – –
Continuous AF
(=
80)
On *1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off *1
O O O O
O O
O
–
O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
Focus mode (=
81)
AF *1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF/AF+MF *1
O O O O
–
–
O
– –
O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
AF-assist beam (LED)
ring (=
51)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O
201
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
4
MF Peaking Settings
(=
82)
Peaking
On *1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
O O O
Level Low/High *1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Color
Red/Yellow/
Blue
*1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
IS Settings (=
86)
IS Mode*
4
Off *1
O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O O
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous *1
O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
Digital IS
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
O O O
Enable *1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
Enhanced
–
– – – –
– –
– – – – – – –
–
– – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
Auto level
(=
51)
Enable *1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
Disable *1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Lens aberration
correction (=
87)
Peripheral
illumin.
Enable/
Disable
*1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Chromatic
aberration
Enable/
Disable
*1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Diffraction
Enable *1
O O O O
O
–
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
Disable *1
O O O O
O O
O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AEB (=
71)
*1
O O O O
–
– – – – – – – – –
–
– – – – – – – – – – – –
202
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
5*
5
ISO speed (=
71)
ISO Speed
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
194).
ISO Auto *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Highlight tone priority
(=
72)
Disable *1
O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O
Enable *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
72) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Metering mode (=
70) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Flash Control
Flash ring (=
82) See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
194).
E-TTL II meter.
(=
84)
Evaluative *1
O O O O
O O O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O O
–
– –
Average *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
Red-eye reduc.
(=
51)
On/Off *1
O O O O
O O O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O O
– – –
Safety FE
(=
83)
Enable *1
O O O O
O O O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O O
–
– –
Disable *1
O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
Built-in ash
settings
Flash Mode
(=
93)
E-TTL II *1
O O O O
O O O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O O
– – –
Manual ash *1
O O O
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– –
Shutter
Sync. (=
84)
1st curtain *1
O O O O
O O O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O O
– – –
2nd curtain *1
O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
exp. comp.
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
194).
ash output
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
194).
External ash func. setting (=
172)
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– –
External ash C.Fn setting (=
174)
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
Clear settings
(=
85, =
174)
Clear built-in ash set.
O O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
Clear external ash set./
Clear ext. ash C.Fn set.
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– –
203
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
6*
6
White balance (=
73) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Custom WB (=
73)
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
WB correction (=
74) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Picture Style (=
75) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Long exp. noise
reduction (=
89)
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Auto/Enable *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
High ISO speed NR
(=
88)
Standard *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Disable/Low/High/Multi
Shot Noise Reduction
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
204
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
7*
7
Drive mode (=
46) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Self-timer/Remote ctrl (=
44) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Digest Type (=
41)
Include Stills/
No Stills
–
– – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
– – – – – –
AF auto switch
(=
44)
Enable
–
– – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
Disable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Keep setting
(=
53)
Disable/Enable
–
– – – –
– –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – –
Time-lapse movie
settings (=
65)
Shooting
scene
Scene 1/Scene 2/
Scene 3/Custom
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
– – – – –
O
Interval/ Shots
2-4 sec./ 30-900
(Scene 1)
5-10 sec./ 30-720
(Scene 2)
11-30 sec./ 30-
240 (Scene 3)
2-30 sec./ 30-900
(Custom)
– – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– –
O
Exposure
Fixed/
For each
shot
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
Review
image
Enable/
Disable
– – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– –
O
205
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
8
Movie rec. size (=
49) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
196).
Sound recording (=
66)
Sound recording
Auto/Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
Manual *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
– – –
O O
–
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Rec. level *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
Wind lter/
Attenuator
Wind Filter
Auto *1
O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
Off *1
O O O O
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – –
O O O
Attenuator
Auto *1
O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off/On *1
O O O O
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
Movie Servo AF
(=
64)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
O
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O
O O
–
AF w/ shutter button
during
(=
64)
ONE SHOT *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Auto slow shutter
Enable *1
O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
Disable *1
O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Set to [Off] and cannot be adjusted when [
] (or [ ]) and [ ] are both selected.
*3 Only available when the AF method is [
].
*4 Not displayed for EF or EF-S lenses, or for EF-M lenses without image stabilization.
*5 Items from the [
6] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in [ ] mode. Items from the [ 7]
tab are shown on the [
5] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
*6 Items from the [
7] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items from the
[
8] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
*7 Items from the [
8] tab are shown on the [ 7] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
206
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
C.Fn Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
/
C.Fn I:
Exposure
(=
96)
ISO expansion
Disable *
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Enable *
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Safety shift
Disable *
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Enable *
–
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
C.Fn II:
Others
(=
96)
Dial direction
during Tv/Av
Normal *
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Reverse direction *
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
Custom
Controls
Shutter/AE
lock
AF/AE lock *
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
AE lock/AF *
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
AF/AF lock,
no AE lock
*
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
AE/AF, no
AE lock
*
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
Dials
Set
/
func. for
M mode
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Set
Func.
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
207
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
/
C.Fn II:
Others
(=
96)
Custom
Controls
Other
buttons
button
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
button
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
button
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
button
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
button
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
button
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
button
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Release
shutter w/o lens
Disable *
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Enable *
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Retract lens on
power off
Enable *
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Disable *
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) (=
96)
–
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
* Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
208
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
INFO. Quick Control
The INFO. Quick Control screen (=
69) is not available in these
modes: [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
Shooting Mode
Function
/
Shooting mode
– – – – –
O O O
Shutter speed *
O
–
O
– –
O
–
Aperture value *
O O
– – –
O
–
ISO speed
O O O O O
–
O
–
AEB
O O O O O
– – –
Flash Exp. Comp
O O O O O
– – –
Picture Style
O O O O O O O O
White balance
O O O O O O O O
WB correction
O O O O O O O O
Auto Lighting Optimizer
O O O O O O O
–
Custom Controls
O O O O O O O
–
Metering mode
O O O O O
– – –
Drive mode
O O O O O
– – –
Self-Timer
O O O O O O O O
Image quality
O O O O O O O O
Flash ring
O O O O O
– – –
AF method
O O O O O O O
–
AF operation
O O O O O
– – –
Movie rec. size
– – – – –
O O
–
Rec. level
– – – – –
O O
–
Shooting Mode
Function
/
Wind Filter
– – – – –
O O
–
Attenuator
– – – – –
O O
–
Time-lapse movie settings
– – – – – – –
O
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
* Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
209
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
4
Wi-Fi connect’n
=
127
Wireless settings
=
127
Certication Logo Display
=
162
Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)*
1
=
100
Copyright Info
=
162
Reset camera*
2
=
163
rmware ver.: *.*.* *
3
=
163
*1 Only available in these modes: [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
*2 Only [Other settings] is available in [
] or [ ] mode.
*3 Only available in these modes: [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[
], and [ ].
My Menu Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
My Menu settings
=
101
Set Up Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
Create Folder
=
155
File Numbering
=
155
Format
=
156
Video system
=
157
Display settings
=
32
Electronic level
=
50
2
Eco Mode
=
157
Power Saving
=
31
Disp. Brightness
=
158
Night Display
=
158
Time Zone
=
159
Date/Time
=
159
3
Language
=
159
Beep
=
159
Operation Vol.
=
160
Hints & Tips
=
160
Mode icon size/info
=
160
Touch Operation
=
160
Sensor cleaning
=
161
210
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Quick Set Menu in Playback Mode
Item Reference Page
Protect
=
112
Rotate
=
116
Rating
=
117
Image Search
=
108
Play Movie
=
104
Play Linked Digest Movie
=
106
Print
=
178
Resize
=
118
Cropping
=
119
Creative lters
=
120
RAW img processing
=
122
Apply
settings
=
55
Playback Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
Protect
=
112
Rotate
=
116
Erase
=
114
Rating
=
117
Slideshow
=
111
2
List/Play Digest Movies
=
106
Image Search
=
108
Creative lters
=
120
3
Resize
=
118
Cropping
=
119
Red-Eye Correction
=
121
RAW img processing
=
122
Print settings
=
181
Photobook Set-up
=
183
4
Transition Effect
=
103
Index Effect
=
107
Scroll Display
=
103
Highlight alert
=
105
AF point disp.
=
105
Playback grid
=
105
Auto Rotate
=
117
5
Resume
=
103
Image jump w/
=
109
resize
=
107, =
110
Playback information display
=
105
Magnify (approx.)
=
111
211
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
● After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the
rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid scratching the lens
surface and electrical contacts.
● Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant
from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.
If spots are still visible on images after automatic sensor cleaning,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request sensor
cleaning.
● Periodically cleaning the camera’s body and lens mount with a soft
lens cleaning cloth is recommended.
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the
lens, battery pack, and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Do not touch the camera or lens contacts. This may cause the camera
to malfunction.
● To avoid damaging the image sensor, do not touch it when it is
exposed after a lens is removed.
● Do not block the shutter operation with your nger, etc. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
212
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Exposure Control
Metering mode ...................................... Real-time metering using the
image sensor, Evaluative, Partial
metering, Center Weighted Avg.,
Spot
Brightness metering range
(room temperature, ISO 100)
EV value ........................................... 1 - 20
Exposure control ................................... Program AE, Shutter priority AE,
Aperture priority AE, Manual
exposure
Exposure compensation
Manual .............................................. ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments
AE bracketing ................................... ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments
(Can be used together with
manual compensation)
ISO speed
(recommended exposure index)
ISO Auto range (AUTO mode)
Min. speed .................................... ISO 100
Max. speed ................................... ISO 6400
Max. ISO speed (P mode) .................. ISO 25600
AE lock
(Manual/Auto) ............................. Provided
White Balance
WB settings ........................................... Auto, Day Light, Shade, Cloudy,
Tungsten light, White uorescent
light, Flash, Color temperature,
Custom
White balance correction ...................... Provided
Specications
Type
Category ............................................... DSLR non-reex AF AE cameras
Image Sensor
Sensor size
Image sensor size............................. Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm
Number of pixels
Camera effective pixels
(Pixels may
decrease due to image processing)
......... Approx. 24.2 megapixels
Total pixels ........................................ Approx. 25.8 megapixels
Aspect ratio ........................................... 3:2
Dust removal feature
(Auto/Manual) ........ Provided
Focus Control
AF method ............................................ Face+Tracking AF, 1-point AF
AF points (max.) ............................... 49 points
Focusing brightness range
(room temperature, ISO 100,
when using EF-M22mm F2 STM)
EV value ....................................... –1 - 18
Focus operation
TTL autofocus ................................... One-Shot AF, Servo AF
AF-assist beam ..................................... Built-in LED lamp
213
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Viewnder/Monitor
Electronic color viewnder
Screen size ....................................... 0.39 type
Pixels ................................................ Approx. 2,360,000 dots
Monitor
Type .................................................. TFT color liquid crystal
Screen size ....................................... 3.2 type
Effective pixels .................................. Approx. 1,620,000 dots
Depth-of-eld preview ........................... Provided
Displayed languages ............................ English, German, French, Dutch,
Danish, Portuguese, Finnish,
Italian, Norwegian, Swedish,
Spanish, Greek, Russian, Polish,
Czech, Hungarian, Romanian,
Ukrainian, Turkish, Arabic, Thai,
Simplied Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, Korean, Japanese
Shooting
Image processing
Noise reduction
Long exposure shots .................... At exposure of one second and
above and at bulb exposure
High ISO speed shots ................... At any ISO speed
Image correction
Auto Lighting Optimizer ............... Provided
Highlight tone priority .................... Provided
Lens correction (EF-M lens has
in-lens correction data)
.......................... Peripheral illumination correction,
Chromatic aberration correction,
Diffraction correction
Picture Style...................................... Auto, Standard, Portrait,
Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral,
Faithful, Monochrome, User Def.1,
User Def.2, User Def.3
Shutter
Method .................................................. Focal-plane
Shutter speed
Range in all shooting modes
Max. Tv ......................................... 30 sec.
Min. Tv .......................................... 1/4000 sec.
Fastest synchronized
shutter speed with ash .................... 1/200 sec.
Flash
Built-in ash
Type .................................................. Manual pop-up ash
Specication
Guide number (ISO 100/m) ............. Approx. 5
Flash range (indication for reference) (approx. range in m)
ISO Speed
EF-M15-45mm F3.5-6.3 IS STM
Wide-angle: f/3.5 Telephoto: f/6.3
100 0.5 – 1.4 0.5 – 0.9
200 0.5 – 2.0 0.5 – 1.3
400 0.5 – 2.9 0.5 – 1.8
800 0.7 – 4.0 0.5 – 2.5
1600 1.0 – 5.7 0.5 – 3.6
3200 1.5 – 8.1 0.8 – 5.1
6400 2.1 – 11.4 1.2 – 7.1
12800 2.9 – 16.2 1.6 – 10.1
25600 equivalent 4.1 – 22.9 2.4 – 14.3
External ash ........................................ E-TTL II autoash, Flash functions
settable with the camera
FE lock .................................................. Provided
214
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Number of shots
Still image
Using a 16 GB UHS-I memory card
Image Quality
Number of Shots
(indication for reference)
1833 shots
2760 shots
3114 shots
4671 shots
4717 shots
6656 shots
8098 shots
450 shots
RAW + JPEG (
)
361 shots
Continuous shooting
Drive mode ....................................... Single shooting, Continuous shooting
(Max.: approx. 9.0 shots/sec.)
Maximum number of shots at burst
Approx. 26 shots
Approx. 25 shots
Approx. 24 shots
Approx. 23 shots
Approx. 24 shots
Approx. 17 shots
RAW + JPEG (
)
Approx. 16 shots
Recording
File format ............................................. DCF-compliant DPOF compatible
(Version1.1)
Data type
Still images
Recording format .......................... Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0)
Images
(RAW images shot
continuously are processed
using 12-bit AD conversion)
................ JPEG/RAW (CR2 a Canon 14-bit
RAW format)
Movies
Recording format .......................... MP4
Video............................................. MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio ............................................ MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)
Rec. level adjustment ............... Provided
Wind lter .................................. Provided
Attenuator ................................. Provided
215
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Playback
Zoom magnication display
Zoom magnication .......................... Min.: approx. 2.0 x
Max.: approx. 10.0 x
Highlight alert ........................................ Provided
Rating ................................................... Provided
Image protect ........................................ Provided
Image browsing methods ...................... Single image, Jump 10 images,
Jump 100 images, Image search
(Rating, Date, People, Still images,
Movies, Digest movies), Scroll
Display
Slideshow ............................................. All images, slideshow of images
after selection from the search list
Post-processing of images
(Possible only with images
taken with same model)
......................... Creative lters (Grainy B/W, Soft
focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold
effect, Water painting effect, Toy
camera effect, Miniature effect),
Resize, Red-Eye Correction
Customizing
Registration of Custom Functions ......... Shutter button, Main dial, Quick
control dial, Cross button (up,
down, left, right), Control dial,
M-Fn button, Movie button, Touch
& Drag AF switching button
Copyright Info ....................................... Provided
Movie
Using a 16 GB UHS-I memory card
Image
Quality
Recording File Size
(indication for reference)
Recordable Time Per a
Memory Card
(indication for reference)
4288 KB/sec. 59 min. 30 sec.
2945 KB/sec. 1 hr. 26 min. 5 sec.
2945 KB/sec. 1 hr. 26 min. 5 sec.
1969 KB/sec. 2 hr. 8 min. 27 sec.
382 KB/sec. 10 hr. 22 min. 35 sec.
● Continuous recording is possible until the memory card becomes full
or the recording time reaches approx. 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
Recording media ................................... SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
Folder setting ........................................ Monthly/Daily
File numbering ...................................... Continuous, Auto Reset
216
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Operating Environment
Temperature .......................................... Min.: 0 °C (32 °F),
Max.: 40 °C (104 °F)
Humidity ................................................ 85 % or less
Dimensions (CIPA compliant)
W .......................................................... 115.6 mm (4.6 in.)
H ........................................................... 89.2 mm (3.5 in.)
D ........................................................... 60.6 mm (2.4 in.)
Weight (CIPA compliant)
Camera body only ................................. Approx. 380 g (13.4 oz.)
Including battery pack, memory
card ....................................................... Approx. 427 g (15.1 oz.)
Battery Pack LP-E17
Type .................................................. Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated voltage.................................... 7.2 V DC
Battery capacity ................................ 1040 mAh
Working temperature range .............. Charging:
5 °C - 40 °C (41 °F - 104 °F)
Shooting:
0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F)
Working humidity .............................. 85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D) ...................... Approx. 33.0 x 14.0 x 49.4 mm
(1.30 x 0.55 x 1.94 in.)
Weight ............................................... Approx. 45 g (1.59 oz.) (excluding
protective cover)
Power
Battery pack .......................................... LP-E17
Number of still image shots
(CIPA compliant)
Monitor On .................................... Approx. 295 shots
Electronic color viewnder On ..... Approx. 295 shots
Number of still image shots
(Eco Mode On)
Monitor On .................................... Approx. 420 shots
Movie recording time (CIPA compliant)
Monitor On .................................... Approx. 85 min.
Electronic color viewnder On ..... Approx. 90 min.
Interface
Wired .................................................... Digital terminal (Hi-Speed USB
compliant), HDMI OUT terminal
Wireless
NFC .................................................. NFC Forum Type3/4 Tag compliant
(Dynamic)
Bluetooth
Compliance standards .................. Bluetooth Specication Version 4.1
(Bluetooth low energy technology)
Transmission scheme ................... GFSK modulation scheme
Wi-Fi
Compliance standards .................. IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Transmission frequency
Frequency ................................. 2.4 GHz
Channels .................................. 1–11 ch
Security
Infrastructure mode ..................... WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WEP
* Wi-Fi Protected Setup compliant
Camera access point mode ......... WPA2-PSK (AES)
Ad hoc mode ................................ WPA2-PSK (AES)
217
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Battery Charger LC-E17/ LC-E17E
Compatible battery ................................ Battery Pack LP-E17
Recharging time .................................... Approx. 2 hours (at room
temperature)
Rated input ........................................... 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output ......................................... 8.4 V DC / 700mA
Working temperature range .................. 5 °C - 40 °C (41 °F - 104 °F)
Working humidity .................................. 85% or less
Dimensions
(W x H x D) .......................... Approx. 67.3 x 27.7 x 92.2 mm
(2.65 x 1.09 x 3.63 in.)
Weight ................................................... LC-E17: Approx. 85 g (3.00 oz.)
LC-E17E: Approx. 80 g (2.82 oz.)
(excluding power cord)
● All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards and
guidelines.
● Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are
based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
● Product specications and the exterior are subject to change without
notice.
● If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera,
consult the respective lens manufacturer.
218
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Index
E
Eco mode 157
Editing
Cropping 119
Red-eye correction 121
Resizing images 118
Editing or erasing connection
information 151
Erasing 114
Erasing all 116
Error messages 189
Exposure
AE lock 70
Compensation 69
FE lock 84
F
Face+Tracking 78
Faithful 75
Favorites 117
FEB 173
FE lock 84
File numbering 155
Filter effect 76
Firmware 163
First-curtain synchronization 173
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 60
Flash
Deactivating ash 83
Flash exposure compensation 83
On 83
Slow synchro 83
Flash exposure compensation 83
Flash mode 173
Focusing
AF frames 77
AF lock 79
MF peaking 82
Servo AF 80
Touch AF 79
Focus lock 78
Focus range
Manual focus 81
Food (shooting mode) 58
Front dial 4
G
Grainy B/W (shooting mode) 60
Grid lines 34
H
Handheld night scene (shooting
mode) 56
HDMI cable 169
High dynamic range (shooting mode)
63
High ISO speed noise reduction 88
Household power 170
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 41
I
Icons 191, 192
Image dust prevention 161
Image quality
→
Compression
Images
Display period 52
Erasing 114
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 112
Image stabilization 86
Image Sync 147
Index display 107
Indicator 38, 51
Index
Numbers
1-point (AF frame mode) 78
A
AC adapter 167, 170
Accessories 167
AEB shooting 71
AE lock 70
AF frames 77
AF lock 79
AF-point zoom 81
Art bold effect (shooting mode) 61
Aspect ratio 49
Auto Lighting Optimizer 72
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 26, 39
Auto rotate 117
Av (shooting mode) 91
B
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time
battery)
Power saving 31
Battery charger 2, 167
Battery pack
Charging 19
Eco mode 157
Level 191
Power saving 31
Black and white images 60
Bulb exposure 93
B/W (monochrome) 75
C
Camera
Reset all 163
Camera access point mode 136
Camera Connect 130
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 136
Charging 19
Chromatic aberration correction 87
Cleaning (image sensor) 161
Close-up (shooting mode) 56
Color temperature 74
Color (white balance) 73
Compression 47
Contrast 76
Creative Assist (shooting mode) 53
Creative lters (shooting mode) 59
Cropping 119, 179
C (shooting mode) 100
Custom Functions 96
Custom WB 73
Custom white balance 73
D
Date/time
Changing 22
Date/time battery 22
Settings 21
World clock 159
DC coupler 167, 170
Deactivating ash 83
Defaults
→
Reset all
Display language 23
Display period 52
DLNA 127
DPOF 181
219
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Index
Resizing images 118
Rotating 116
S
Saturation 76
Saving images to a computer 148,
177
Screen
Display language 23
Icons 191, 192
Menu
→
Quick Set menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 108
Second-curtain synchronization 173
Self portrait (shooting mode) 57
Self-timer 44
2-second self-timer 45
Customizing the self-timer 45
Sending images 136
Sending images to another camera
143
Sending images to a smartphone 128
Sending images to Web services 139
Sensor cleaning 161
Servo AF 80
Sharpness 76
Shooting
Shooting information 191
Single-image display 28
Slideshow 111
Slow synchro 83
Soft focus (shooting mode) 60
Software
Installation 176
Saving images to a computer
177
User manual 176
Sounds 159
Sports (shooting mode) 56
Strap 18
T
Terminal 169, 170, 178
Time-lapse movie (shooting mode) 65
Tone priority 72
Toning effect 76
Touch AF 79
Touch-screen panel 4
Touch Shutter 46
Traveling with the camera 159
Tripod socket 4
Troubleshooting 185
TV display 169
Tv (shooting mode) 90
V
Viewing 28
Image search 108
Index display 107
Jump display 109
Magnied display 110
Single-image display 28
Slideshow 111
TV display 169
W
Water painting effect (shooting mode)
61
White balance (color) 73
Wireless features 127
Wireless ash shooting 173
World clock 159
Z
Zoom 26
Installation 176
ISO speed 71
J
Jump display 109
L
Landscape 75
Landscape (shooting mode) 56
Lens 23
Lock release 24
Level 191
Long exposure 93
Long exposure noise reduction 89
M
M (shooting mode) 92
Macro photography 56
Magnied display 110
Manual focus 81
Memory cards 2
Menu
Basic operations 35
Table 194
Metering method 70
MF (Manual focusing) 81
MF peaking 82
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 62
Movies
Editing 124
Image quality (recording pixels/
frame rate) 49
Multi-function button 97
Multi Shot Noise Reduction 87, 88
N
Neck strap
→
Strap
Neutral 75
Noise reduction
High ISO speed 88
Long exposure 89
O
On 83
P
P (shooting mode) 68
Package contents 2
Panning (shooting mode) 58
Part names 4
Peripheral illumination correction 87
Photobook set-up 183
PictBridge 169, 178
Picture Style 75
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 56
Power 167
→
AC adapter,
→
Battery
charger,
→
Battery pack
Power saving 31
Printing 178
Program AE 68
Protecting 112
Q
Q menu
→
Quick Set menu
Quick Set menu
Basic operations 34
Table 196
R
Rating 117
RAW 48
RAW image processing 122
Recording pixels (image size) 47
Red-eye correction 121
Remote live view shooting 149
Reset all 163
220
Basic Guide
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
• Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless function of this product within the guidelines
noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss
if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in
this guide.
• Do not use the wireless function of this product near medical equipment
or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless function near medical equipment or other electronic
equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
• This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
• Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
• Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or
Others)
• Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use
- Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and regions,
and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations.
To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon website to
check where use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
wireless function use in other countries and regions.
• Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
• Before goods or technologies in the camera regulated by the Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Act are exported (which includes bringing
them outside Japan or showing them to non-residents in Japan), export
or service transaction permission may be required from the Japanese
government.
• Because this product includes American encryption items, it falls under
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or
brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
• Be sure to make notes of the Wi-Fi settings you use.
The wireless settings saved to this product may change or be erased due
to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static
electricity, or accident or malfunction.
Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or
indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or
disappearance of content.
• When transferring ownership, disposing of the product, or sending it for
repair, restore the default wireless settings by erasing any settings you
have entered.
• Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product
due to loss or theft of the product.
221
Basic Guide
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Personal Information and Security Precautions
If personal information and/or Wi-Fi security settings, such as passwords,
etc., are saved on the camera, please be aware that such information and
settings may still remain in the camera.
When transferring the camera to another person, disposing of it, or sending
it for repair, be sure to take the following measures to prevent the leakage
of such information and settings.
• Erase registered Wi-Fi security information by choosing [Reset Settings]
in the Wi-Fi settings.
Trademarks and Licensing
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
• App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
• Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in
the United States and in other countries.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
• Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
Third-Party Software
• expat.h
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation les (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
222
Basic Guide
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Disclaimer
• Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
• All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
• Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
• Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
• The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
